Home

2012 Dodge Charger SRT8 Owner`s Manual

1. 39 Defroster Rear Window 276 Defroster Windshield 84 346 Delay Intermittent Wipers su sod we eg eee x 205 Diagnostic System Onboard 460 Dimmer Switch Headlight ss way ne dem oe s 200 Dipsticks OES note p uit oxen tan oe Re TE me 464 POWER StEG ase HEER RAS d Ed ES 977 Disabled Vehicle Towing 0 453 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 480 Euge iii haan HIER ae gee oes 466 Door LOCKS 4424464 H 28 542 INDEX M Door Locks Automatic Door Opener Garage Driving On Slippery Surfaces Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy Electric Rear Window Defrost Electric Remote Mirrors Electrical Power Outlets Electronic Brake Control System Anti Lock Brake System Brake Assist System Traction Control System Electronic Power Distribution Center Fuses Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control Electronic Stability Control ESC 214 492 217 384 Electronic Vehicle Information Center ENG ea eres ee segue ates she ees 249 291 Emergency Deck Lid Release s s0 eas4edwes 2 es 41 Emergency Trunk Release uuu sce etx xe 41 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 450 Hazard Warning Flasher gs scastawece va 434 JUMP Staring des dor 3 dues ER RR Rd DER E 446 AOG AERODEN 434 TOWING sier Ge oy ein andes rica bord ee a 453 E
2. 4 501 O Front Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp And Side Marker Lamp Models With Halogen Headlamps Im 501 D Front Low Beam Headlamp And Park Turn Lamp Models With High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID 502 El BackUp amps 252 2 29 93 927 GEDEK RE BRA 503 E DICONSe Lamp si d uere sd oe ye cs A ARRA PR 504 W Fluid Capacities ao se xar ad prr as 505 Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 506 GPN DG 4 fine tee ot aah eR ERE ES E 506 sie 4 4 4 so 49 ETE TEE ee RSS 507 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 6 4L 392 HEMl M j M 4 m L 3 a aie IN S P IE x gt r 9 9 ed 1 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 6 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Integrated Power Module Fuses 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Washer Fluid Reservoir 5 Engine Coolant Reservoir 460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating prope
3. 249 New Vehicle Break In Period 81 Occupant Restate 2co 9 aes MEER por vob dos 41 62 66 Occupant Restraints Sedan 57 58 62 65 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 421 506 enu A rv 281 OIL CBange IBalcdfoOE sss donacione aes 282 298 Oil Change Indicator Reset 282 298 Oil Titer CHange C 466 Oil Filter Selection set m v5 eb Ge RA OG EH 466 Ol EWC i394 00 ce he fe ee OR RR Capacity Change Interval 550 INDEX NEE Id CHECKS 4555 64 oheen02 oun TERRE ER ie 464 DIBEHEK 246644665 45404 55445 PR ea 464 Died 2244444505 HE RE MR ee ees a HER 466 MG AE RT SE OE OF 466 506 Filter Disposal sx 2 cits ee EE cee ee NEE 466 Materials Added 10 a s2 04u6se60ees4 23 465 Recommendation 465 505 AMIDE iade tie pA geh eee ID DER 465 MISCOSID 4 vua uie dew 29 994 ves as 465 505 Onboard Diagnostic System sis bis sa ER ER BE 460 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 209 Operating Precautions es wed RARR ER EED 4 460 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors 04 95 gucci rm 370 Overdrive OFF SWIC ses ss 46d RE S225 ex 370 Overhead Console s eds eeu RR ESE RDA aes 251 Overheating Engine 242229 9299429 395 290 434 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 533 Pane ates AR ES REEDE en ee ee eee eee ee 486 Paaie DU 23 2nd eee EL SERE Benen ee cane 22 Park Sense DUSICHL ROUT s acia
4. 032737806 Continuous Tone The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert opera tion when the system is detecting an obstacle N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 WARNING ALERTS Rear vi Greater Don 79 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 12 in 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Slow Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone Display Message Park Assist Warning Object Warning Object Warning Object Warning Object Read Detected Detected Detected Detected Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow Continuous Flashing Flashing Flashing Enabling And Disabling ParkSense When the ParkSense soft key is pressed to disable the ParkSense can be enabled and disabled using the system the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYS Uconnect Touch System The available choices are Off TEM OFF message for approximately five seconds Sound Only or Sound and Display Refer to Uconnect Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further Panel for further information information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for as long
5. General Information FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems Classification Specifications 47 C ER Part 15 47 C ER Part 15 515 Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode a normal fixed speed Cruise Control mode is available for cruis ing at fixed speeds The normal Cruise Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requir ing the driver to operate the accelerator Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h To change modes press the MODE button when the system is in either the OFF READY or SET position Cruise Ready will be displayed if the system was in ACC READY or ACC SET position Cruise Off will be N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 displayed if the system was in the ACC OFF position To switch back to Adaptive Cruise Control mode press the MODE button a second time WARNING In the normal Cruise Control mode the system will not react to vehicles ahead In addition the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle to vehicle distance is detected Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead Always be aware which mode is selected To Set A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired press the SET
6. 246 ll Parkview Rear Back Up Camera If EQUID DCCs sac EE OT ER EE ne gars ta 249 O Turning Parkview On Or Off With Touch via T B ono MP aeaut ee D 251 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Mi Overhead Console O Front Map Reading Lights O Sunglass Bin Door Mi Garage Door Opener If Equipped oO Before You Begin Programming HomeLink O Programming A Rolling Code O Programming A Non Rolling Code O Canadian Gate Operator Programming O Using Homelink uan as REEDS EER El EO fa wee 90S e AR ED HER E EY qd 2 EL Troubleshooting Tips amp si as ske ne EER EER O General Information 251 W Power Sunroof If Equipped 261 O Opening Sunroof Express 262 D Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 262 B Closing Sunroof Express 262 B Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 263 E Dineh Protect Feature exea thea 263 O Venting Sunroof Express 263 O Sunshade Operation xad d e es 263 El Wind Bulete rasse ae rras Rg RE RD 263 O Sunroof Maintenance 4 lt 4 hear e KERR ED 264 O Ignition Off Operation 0 264 O Sunroor Fully Closed ode op v dub te se ee ee 264 B Electrical Power Outlets 264 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 IM piele sm oL ETRSEERCRPOREENAES 268 HLDOOFSIDIMBO sevas ESE EDELE NEW AA 274 Hi Froiit Seat Cupholder as sco oa Hb 268
7. 429 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading RHEEDER REDE es 398 429 431 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vemicie old E sus tance to phra ar RUE 350 500 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 ViscOst ENE DE Ol oi wes AREA LAE DES Wi 465 Warning Flasher Hazard 4 434 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 2s s br EE Di 281 Warnings and Cautions Ee EE Ee Ee Ee 6 Warranty Information eua queo d vues vv s EE E 992 Washer A SMC oase EED Ge oe ae BEE 473 Washers Windshield 205 206 473 Washing Velidele sieaas oo ete ee MARK genau gee 487 Water Divine INOUE ordes ink 9 804 Han A eae 374 Wheel and Wheel Trim 488 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 488 Wind Dueling Luo ip oe sees DE 39 263 N INDEX 557 do Fo oD oo n GEED RAAR DAE eet 350 Windshield Wiper Blades 2 s 472 lg 355443654 KOPER PR EE EED oS oe 4 86 Windshield Wipers 2x ac 3 9 9 hor p60 24 hens ee RS 205 zo P DEE ee EA OD eons 36 Wiper Blade Replacement siese ses de DR S 472 Windshield Defroster ie oe six mee RR GE Rd 64 Wipet Delay aee esa Hie nee Robo ees 205 Windshield Washers 205 206 Wipers Intermitient 212 ow 8 dors o rh et acea 205 FIG ER es ae OE TES 473 Wipers Rain Sensitive au deas ke xS 207 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated in
8. If tire pressure is less than 19 psi 1 3 Bar the tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance If the tire pressure is 19 psi 1 3 bar or higher 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn on TIREFIT and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver side door open ing NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 445 2 Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet 3 Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle 4 Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire ser vice center 5 Replace the Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement NOTE When having the tire serviced advise the au thorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the TIREFIT service kit F Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement 1 Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 clear in color 2 Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the sealant bottle 3 Press the Sealant Bottle release button The Sealant Bott
9. Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR 1 To install a child restraint with ALR first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor As the belt retracts you will hear a ratcheting sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M To attach a child restraint tether strap 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path 1 Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the for the strap between the anchor and the child seat seat where you are placing the child restraint 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child restraint to the anchor B and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head mo
10. Soft keys 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 044435866 Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Automatic Temperature Controls Soft keys Button Descriptions Applies To Both Hard keys And Soft keys 1 A C Button Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning A C setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON If equipped with ATC performing this function will cause the automatic operation to switch into manual mode and the AUTO indicator will turn off 2 Recirculation Control Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 3 Blower Control Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system There are seven blower speeds available Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation if equipped with ATC The speeds can be selected using either hard heys or soft keys as follows NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343 position Blower control should be left in the ON position to allow the climate control to either warm or cool the vehicle Hard key The blower speed increases as you turn the control clockwise from the lowest blower setting The blower speed decreases as you turn the knob counter clockwise Soft key Uco
11. Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 530 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 423 6343 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Pas
12. If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery fy bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean 482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Chec
13. Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Voice Command e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command period e Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition e Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as
14. WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Reset Auto Up Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up 1 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors To disable the window controls press and release the window lockout button setting it in the DOWN position To enable the window controls press and release the window lockout button again setting it in the UP position NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Window Lockout Switch 021935321 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the f
15. if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In an accident you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause an accident that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and
16. in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first second and third gears direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick mode refer to AutoStick in this section to select a lower gear Under these conditions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup ee STARTING AND OPERATING 369 Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped the transmission will remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will con
17. tamer on ME STR WHS Tome ately Uie LAS mm pes plante tela te Ve Um skerm ny mt med Enter message TOM dened kel frrivide m singing IN by system or say tor List to haar ali 18 downloaded defined nessayes town phone p Wig tha message text i Alarme massage displayess tine latinus id eral js pead aul e rxwnerzimde sert cutis ander message nimang ciiis ening me Uconmect phone are avasiable automatically has T Messe nt HG umber i writ try Mesane trat Fnirr messur frm wil e read out dehned lst provide Dy over the system or say List t vehicle asuma hear al 18 defined system meossBsges Enter in contact r dmis saut phone tyne 030863305 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 NOTE You can replace John Smith with any name in your mobile or favorite phone book You can also say Send a message to John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to send a message to If your phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over Bluetooth than these com mands will return a response that the contact does not exist in the phonebook Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and for John Smith underlined in the gray shaded boxes e You can replace Mobile with Home Work or Other General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to
18. Air Cleaner ARE d doe mE 8S REX 466 Air ONGMIONING a Picea EE EE RE e qe 350 470 Exe ipe O soas se PA peer JUR RU 466 506 Engine OU Disposal sa separ ieas c e 466 Flash To Pass zog sd 04444064 cee EX Re 200 Flashers Hazard Wami g ziudx pbipeeer c td goes S 434 Jub Siel uz 94 9 ERE eae PRED 86 199 281 Flooded Engine Starine seek ERWE ac ERES 360 Floor Console 544 INDEX NEE Id Hac Ca e Ole euo c3 eae SHIRE RE P ER hs 505 Fluid Leaks ek es oes HEER RR eB eG 86 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 485 c A 482 COONS een uruceiea ies s wr Sob ue onan eee 477 biede Ol sis ooms ane oe ea PURUS eons 464 Power DIESE 2232 254 26e528n0 45554 377 Fluid Brake 22 29 09 x excu eed 507 PIMOS see se de oh be DEE 4 AE aon ed N Rd 506 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 506 los del CP nnm 198 281 FONG Kear DOE occuro ie s aa Rat one de en 188 Forward Collision Warning 299 295 Freeme A Stuck Vehid Lassen dr RR 450 Duel 222 29 229 BU CE T SU RR HR AUR MEER E 421 AOOIHUDS jo dn DE ME Ra PER Geese tes A24 ble AI nce et eee EERS ose EE AE ee 422 COMSCIUING AARTO 95 EE EE 300 Eli ol 23444546445 ER RE EE OR E 422 Filler Door Gas Cap uid p49 08s dc bed eos 285 Gasol si sua ER eee 93 ARE d Pd wd 421 Sol peek er 285 EISDE REIS N ETE EO TER ET 295 Materials Added 424 Methanol sisie sd wares KAR FOR TREE HEDE 422 Oclane RAUDE uides aricteke e AE
19. LE Yes No Okay I can t talk right now 2 3 9 6 7 8 9 Call me TH call you later Tm on my way Thanks I ll be late 10 I will be number minutes late NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 11 I2 13 14 15 16 17 18 See you in lt number gt minutes Stuck in traffic Start without me Where are you Are you there yet I need directions I m lost See you later Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone OFF ON Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode 3 Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Memm Voice Tree Uconnect Hands Free Calling Uconnect Hands Free Calling The commands can be spoken from any screen gfier pushing tha connect Phones ation te on be Available commands while phone call is in progress steerina wheel g The canere csi bic spoken ah HY gaton while s GM e ve iie tushla Vie Leona vors conimend bulion to pn the steering whsel Shows Ihe Number Last Last associated number incoming wall list will geh a JO SEM Number ia Dial Tones for wth entry i5 called is cal
20. Phone e Redial e Dial by touching in the number e Voice Commands Dial by Saying a Name Call by Saying a Phonebook Name Redial or Call Back e Favorite Phonebook e Mobile Phonebook e Recent Call Log e SMS Message Viewer NOTE All of the above operations except Redial can be done with 1 call or less active Dial By Saying A Number e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Dial 248 555 1212 e The Uconnect Phone will dial 248 555 1212 Call By Saying A Phonebook Name e Press the amp button to begin the number e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call John Doe Mobile e The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated with John Doe or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Call Controls The touch screen allows you to control the following call features Answer End Ignore Hold unhold Mute unmute Transfer the call to from the phone Swap 2 active calls Join 2 active calls together Touch Tone Number Entry e Touch the Phone soft key e Touch the Dial soft key e The Touch Tone screen will be displayed e Use the numbered soft keys to enter the number and touch Call To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition VR press the amp vr button while in a call and say Send 1
21. STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume 045040915 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEE Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD HDD AUX VES etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of t
22. US DOT Safety Stan dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 064902773 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo rary emergency use only Temporary high pressure eee STARTING AND OPERATING 393 compact spare tires have the letter T or S molded e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded ample T145 80D18 103M into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank
23. WARNING With the ESC switched OFF the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable In an emer gency evasive maneuver the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off ESC mode is intended for off highway or off road only Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop ona hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 6 approximate grade or greater hill ee STARTING AND OPERATING 389 e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8
24. Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station 462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now read
25. j audio 030939992 Controls Soft Key Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key once to select HI level ventilation Press the soft key a second time to select LO level ventilation Press the soft key a third time to shut off the seat ventilation UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 FM 91 7 54 out during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your TRES SG Del Vehicle for further information Seat Ed AE rk Mt Head Restraints EE EE ot Xe Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear OFF impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNING Controls ente Whe Ventilated Seats Soft Keys The head restraints for all occupant s must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu NOTE Th i tb ing for th tilated m peser ursi see did de pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad seats to operate justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted On models that are equipped with remote start the or removed could cause serious injury or death in the driver s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on event of a collision 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF Y
26. 65 ien TU uos yee eho ee E yt EXCUTERE 86 199 281 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 2 226 0420 gne 075 vitio MP 196 Snow Chains Tire Chains 410 Sound System 4h A Bee BA Gees 336 ate Mie dees dud t BASEER SELA DEE 405 406 park TUDO toa 506 Specifications Fuel Gasoline sess 506 Ol TIPP 506 Speed Control Cruise Control 214 217 DOCCUOMCCE visse ED waned VELD ED E 285 vieron dires P 372 Dit P DIT 25 397 Automatic Transmission 357 Cold Weather ce uos res eee se Red 360 Engine Fails to Start sss Ewe dd oh 34 s 360 up AP mm 26 Staring and Opera EE Eb esr vid DRA 357 Dtarling Procedures i2 9s EER 0654250508 357 554 INDEX NEE Id Steering COMMMMCONUIOIS 2929 2 99 49 1 95 5 ee dide d 199 COUM LOCK oss sees RE AD RR ES 208 lo rl Arm Sud Tilt COMM 22a uen aces Sa ean 2 9 65 AE 208 209 Wheel Heated eee 210 Wheel TE uoces sse ES du RR AR 208 209 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 337 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound Dele COMMIS P DD MU E 937 jc PLC 272 500 SIORISS Velde ocu e RR AU RA RR ary ES 350 500 OLODE vout Velde cus a OR aet oes grs a 500 vine cM DD 450 DUN ROOL 4064620805652 5508 BERR eee ee eee ea 261 Sunglass s Storage nia RE V 996 ORTA RORCHUR ek ee 292 5unroor Maintenance seeks HEER HASE oes 264 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 54 One dei C ua aper 99 dos ea E d 465 System R
27. D Jump Starting Procedure la Freeing A Stuck Vehicle Bl Shift Lever Override 5 DOSE TANM SON s oa du ee eee BEDE Por aS 451 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle 453 O Without The Ignition Key 455 434 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch bank near the top center of the instrument panel Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impend
28. Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS W Mirrors 0 2 Re 94 B Inside Day Night Mirror 94 o Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 94 HOWISIde MITOS a uice aa BRA CE ed es 95 D Outside Mirrors Folding Feature 96 O Driver s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ie delete es AE EE EE OE 96 o Outside Mirrors Approach Light If BQUID DCO gra sees 96 o Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped 96 EL VOWED WMINTOLS 2 20 cee EER vee oy HEDE os 97 D Heated Mirrors If Equipped 98 B Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 98 B Slide On Rod And Extender Features Of Di VSO PC 98 ll Blind Spot Monitoring If Equipped 99 Aker Oro sl oa nae oes ma poeta x 104 El Modes Of Operation 2 ues chess x vhs oe 106 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Bl Uconnect Phone 4 3 0000 eee 107 O Uconnec Touch 4 3 iussu 486 ico e
29. If testing or for prolonged periods during very rough you see or hear steam coming from under the idle or malfunctioning operating conditions hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477 Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or
30. LJ Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate tires filter L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner J Rotate tires filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 517 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter _I Rotate tires L1 Inspect the rear axle fluid Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center O C C C O L L L L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake lin
31. Refer to Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT section F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement The Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 are a one tire application use After each use always replace these components immediately at an authorized dealer When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel components Once the sealant dries it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded e For optimum performance make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the TIREFIT kit You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle tires The kit also comes with two needles located in the Accessory Storage Compartment on the bottom of the air pump for inflating sport balls rafts or similar inflatable items However use only the Air Pump Hose 7 and make sure the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them The TIREFIT Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than V in 6 mm diameter in the tread of your vehicle e Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 439 WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the vehicle closest to traffic Pull far enough off the wheel road to avoid the danger of being hit when using e
32. activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the EVIC displays CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held transmit ter button 4 Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHAN NEL TRAINED then release both buttons NOTE e It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased for the channel to train e If the EVIC displays DID NOT TRAIN repeat from Step 2 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button The EVIC will display CHANNEL TRANSM
33. and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Main taining Your Vehicle for filter replacement instructions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351 Manual Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set tne Mode control to Panel or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS 4 and turn on AVC Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flusned from the vehicle set the Mode control to Recirculate with A C on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level with AVC on If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel and turn on AVC If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control to Bi Level ji with A C on Adjust Temperature plage control for comfort COOL OR COLD Set the Mode control to Mix S _ or Defrost Sg sie CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear de Tat 0 s AT a am A COLD DRY Set the Mode
34. be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steer ing column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter can also be programmed to recall the same posi tions when the UNLOCK button is pressed NOTE e Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the memory positions e Passive Entry door handles cannot be linked to the memory function Use either the memory recall switch or the RKE transmitter if linked to the memory feature to recall memory positions 1 or 2 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The memory seat switch is located on the driver s door trim panel The switch consists of three buttons The S button which is used to activate the memory save function and the 1 and 2 buttons which are used to recall either of two pre programmed memory profiles Ae ad a S 1S N NN 031036877 Memory Seat Switches Programming The Memory Feature NOTE Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory To create a new memory profile p
35. information Using the wrong type of brake fluid or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylin der reservoir Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be Continued taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued 484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx id WARNING Continued e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid No che
36. placard for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle 410 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a differe
37. second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 headlights will turn on the park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 2 Insert the tip of
38. with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Towing With HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer WARNING e HSA is not a parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to follow these wamings may cause the vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide with another vehicle object or person and cause serious or fatal injury Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information 390 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Ready Alert Braking Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver When the throttle is released very quickly Ready Alert Braking applies a small
39. Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 EVIC Amber Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell tales These telltales include e Forward Collision Warning FCW OFF FCW This light warns the driver of a potential colli sion with the vehicle in front and prompts the OFF driver to take action in order to avoid the collision For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator This light will turn on to indicate the wind d ag ym shield washer fluid is low e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Malfunction s This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service For further infor mation refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle EVIC Red Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These telltales include e Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or i more doors may be ajar e Trunk Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that the trunk may be ajar VM j il e Oil Pressure Warning Light wi This light indicate
40. Air Bag Warning Light above can reach higher temperatures than in normal This light will turn on for four to eight seconds operating conditions This can cause a fire if you as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first drive slowly or park over flammable substances such turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result during starting stays on or turns on while in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or driving have the system inspected at an authorized others 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 13 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ies ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light ins
41. Ani Loc ABS Sages ETE ETE OF 381 Hd CHECK so ee 44 PROS 482 507 Master Cynder aus saos EER aay oan pos wp oH 482 Lars 2a a4 454 oboe eee kd A SR Worn LAGE ss op eee RR HA ween Broke Parke 22445 ei ey sone Ge VER ORR Brake Transmission Interlock i is E DERE oe od Gee eee OE Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 540 INDEX M Brightness Interior Liehts x22 22 EED EE Di 203 Bulb Replacement 542340044 prii ER 500 501 Bulbs Ligne os ss eee dus ose a Rr ded 86 500 Camera RAT sco ee os doe EER EES ELI R ASA 249 Capacities Fluid osse se ey RS HR DES RE s 505 Caps Filler CHLTEBSHI siekte nes tus tone ga aes 465 omie DIPCHOS souse sae slee EE GER D ues 377 Radiator Coolant Pressure 479 Car Te rr 487 Carbon Monoxide Warning 82 425 Cargo Vehicle Loading a xn we ws oa ee eee a 429 Celule PRODE PE PET 339 Certification babel 2i u kn map caos RD en 429 Chane Mike EERS Be vee OES Rs ES ee eas 410 Cher Mie IS ese bance HARE ENDER DES 393 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 284 460 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 82 CHECKS ale ies bee EER HERDER oo S 82 Child Restraint siese esse EE 70 72 73 75 79 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 74 75 Child ately Lock qe 31 Clean Air Gasoline EE EES SS SS Se 422 Cleaning EER IE ET ET EES EET EE 488 Windshield Wiper Blades 3e im x ma 472 Climate Control 22 0 cane ae
42. Cell Emergency e The Options pop up will display touch Remove from Favs N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Emergency And Towing Assistance The Emergency and Towing Favorite numbers can only be altered These cannot be deleted and the names cannot be changed To change the Emergency or Towing number follow these steps e Touch the Phonebook soft key from the Phone main screen e Touch the Favorites soft key Next scroll to the bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Favorites e Touch the Options soft key e Touch the next to appropriate Favorite that is to be altered 68 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Ww 72 Phonebook gt Fa 7 s a Voicemail Edit Number Reset to Default Pepe Roni Buddy s Pizza e The Options pop up will appear and you can choose between Editing the number or resetting the number to default Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available and supported by Bluetooth on your mobile service plan 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service pro vider for the features that you have Ways To Initiate A Phone Call Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect
43. Compartment 12 Storage Compartment 18 Paddle Shifters 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 040340807 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator 2 Park Headlight ON Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park ZpQg lights or headlights are turned on 3 Turn Signal Indicators amp The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 4 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 5 High Beam Indicator ED This indicator shows that the high beam head lights are on Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 6 Odometer Display Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has
44. E ee 486 Arming Theft System Security Alarm I7 Assist Hill Start llle 388 Auto Down Power Windows 37 Auto Unlock Doors eee 30 Auto Up Power Windows 42242526 OES 9 xa 37 Automatic Dimming MiTTOr 202424244 wea we 94 N INDEX 539 Automatic Door Locks less 30 Agtomauc FHeadlishts 23399300 908 Porcius d 196 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 298 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 348 Automatic Transaxle Special AddilVeS a a x3 icd x RYS ROSE AE KERE 484 Automatic Transmission 363 484 485 Adding Flid 423 5 eed ERIS Ge 485 507 AWOSE wes does shee HAAS oe ee VET 370 Fl id and Filter Changes a sues ee 9o 485 oi Chane RO soe tt oe pone 9 Cin deg 485 Fluid Level Check SS SS SS Es 485 PIMC DPO C 507 Dpeeidl AddINVES vs dcs 99 94305 iR RC aS 484 Autostick RAATS AAS SE RES EF 370 Ale Mid si 25 4 ES AE SAG es EER ES 507 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 507 B Pillar LOCAHODE ean sa DE be VEE tian 997 cnc Scapa seen eee eee ee ee totes FEE 467 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 23 seco ot eo gh ROKERS eae hee OR 467 Belts Seat 2444 MOER donee one deen ceases 43 84 Body Mechanism Lubrication aa 472 Drake Assist SIE gin cen AR Bars Bee ES ma 384 Brake Control System Electronic zione 383 brake did si ie KARRE ENG HY UP ae ees 507 Blake V BIB oa re ocean a saree Sed DEd EA EE 482
45. Enter N Go To Disarm The System insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the key to the ON position the following methods NOTE 2 e Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless e The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Entry RKE transmitter Security Alarm e Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if equipped refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further infor mation The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether press the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors e Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Secur
46. Go a we 34 0 6 ns n RR 32 358 Keyless Enty SISTI dos oa Vrae kone 35s aoe oa 20 Keyless GO aal Ge VERRE AREA ORR RR ID 12 qv rm 12 Kicker Sound System ii duoi iy x RE RACES RE 336 Kee Bolsie T S 54 Lane Change and Turn Signals 199 Lane Change ASSIST use kdo ROM ee aes ous 200 Lapy Shoulder Belis Lace HERE Kee RR deae es 43 N INDEX 547 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 74 75 Latch Plite AR a or Fes Be OS ER pU RS 44 Latches oo keane ee eee ew eee Redon ea s ee es 86 dood 2225903 REA OUR HE bea SR 194 Lead Free Gasoline eee 421 beaks PWG xus sce te te eee ee ee oe es ES 86 Life of Tires s 24426446646 5640 ee CES REA 408 Light DUIDS coo ok EED AE OO EES OO KERS 86 500 LEDO goa heen ee SR esa nae a N GE DE 86 195 PAS ose foe Gong REP a UR d 63 69 84 285 PAU 223 vere oo oe ks BE Oe FR eee ee 286 Anti Lock 22222229 Re RS E 286 Automatic Headlights 196 Brake Assist Warning 0 5 390 Drake Warning 6255654 ote dex oS ache ean 287 bulb Replacement sure ees vx baw 200 501 Dovume Running gue xe PE EAE 198 Dimmer Switch Headlight 199 200 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 390 Eelt sateeeeareeaeees Gane pee eos OE 86 POD veces suet e wee a HA wars RS 198 281 Hazard Warning Flasher 434 Headlight OWING eu iis 2 wae 9 ou a tal eta 195 Head ES sees i qox ena Be HR Headlights On Reminder 23 2 soe sa R49 Headl
47. High Beams soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Daytime Running Lights When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Steering Directed Lights When this feature is selected the headlights turn relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel To make 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M your selection touch the Steering Directed Lights soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Flash Headlights With Lock When this feature is selected the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection touch the Flash Head lights with Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow sof
48. Natural Fuse Spare 20 Amp All Wheel Drive Module 50 Amp ES Radiator Fan 2 Yellow If Eguipped Red ENEN ENEN Fi 10 Amp Air Conditioning Clutch d 30 Amp Starter Red Pink 1 Fuse Spare BER Ed 16 8 494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Power Steering 2 25 Amp Engine Module Natural Fuse Spare EH EN Headlamp Washers 25 Amp Powertrain 1 Natural Fuse Spare 25 Amp Fuel Pump Natural 15 Amp Transmission Shifter Blue Fuse Spare 10 Amp Anti Lock Brake Module Red 10 Amp Engine Controller Rad Red Fan Relays 10 Amp Airbag Module Red Ek 32 E NM EES 35 20 Amp Powertrain 2 Yellow Kak Kak IT MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495 ni Description Rear Power Distribution Center There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel This center 10 Amp Power Steering Red Module AC Clutch Re l 1 contains fuses and relays 0 Amp AWD Module Front Red Axle Disconnect Fuse Spare 50 Fue Spre Yellow 29 Fuse Spare 58 Fuse Spare 072741464 Rear Power Distribution Center 496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE i Description Fuse Front PDC Feed 1 Front PDC Feed 2 CAUTION e When i
49. Occupant 2 130 Ib e Occupant 3 160 Ibs ts x 100 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 lbs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 tbs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 325 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 401 WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in tire over heating and failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting areas are affected by improper tire pressure in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Continued 402 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one
50. Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Managing Your Favorite Phonebook There are three ways you can add an entry to your Favorite Phonebook 1 During an active call of a number to make a favorite touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the phone main screen 2 After loading the mobile phonebook select phone book from the Phone main screen then select the appro priate numbe
51. Press and release the TRIP ODOMETER button located on the instrument cluster to clear this message The ESC OFF message may appear in the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To turn ESC ON again momentarily press the ESC Off switch NOTE The ESC OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved into the PARK position from any position other than PARK and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur when the message was previously cleared WARNING In the ESC Full Off mode the engine torque reduction and stability features are cancelled There fore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable 388 STARTING AND OPERATING ie NOTE When the ESC is switched OFF a feature of the system remains active This feature controls wheel spin across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with tire chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch
52. Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to see what the stored messages are Pressing the BACK button takes you back to the Main Menu 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Turn Menu OFF Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button Press ing the SELECT button blanks the menu display Pressing any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the menu back Uconnect TOUCH SETTINGS The Uconnect Touch system uses a combination of soft and hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features and SRT Performance Features Hard Keys Hard Keys are located on the left and right side of the Uconnect Touch 4 3 screen In addition there is a Scroll Enter control knob located on the right side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings i e 30 60 90 press the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting i e ON OFF Soft Keys Soft Keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch screen Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Touch 4 3 Settings In this mode the Uconnect Touch system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Heated Seats Engine Off Operation Compass Settings Audio Phone Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup through h
53. Then touch the arrow back soft key 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEE Engine Off Options e Easy Exit Seats If Equipped Touch the Easy Exit Seats soft key to change this display This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Easy Exit Seats soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle for further infor mation e Headlight Off Delay Touch the Headlight Off Delay soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Engine Off Power Delay Touch the Engine Off Power Delay soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key NE UNDERSTA
54. Trim Care e All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion e To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a non abrasive non acidic cleaner N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489 CAUTION e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If EE Care equipped t he cleaned aa died _ Use MOPAR Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric AE GE ag fe upholstery and MOPAR Carpet Cleaner or equivalent for carpeting e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting leon di towel Interior trim should be cleaned starting w
55. VEHICLE 61 WARNING The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door air bags If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need could cause serious injury including death Air Assistance Bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Side air bags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a f
56. also be included if equipped Overhead Console 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Front Map Reading Lights To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The Lights are mounted in the overhead console Each light lights also turn on when a door is opened The lights will can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is the console These buttons are backlit for night time pressed ery Sunglass Bin Door At the front of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compart ment access is a push push design Push the chrome pad on the door to open Push the chrome pad on the door to close 031433150 Front Map Reading Lights 033333448 Sunglass Bin Door GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead console designate the three different HomeLink chan nels HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Be sure that your vehicl
57. also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oil Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engi neered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives 466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE See Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil
58. amount of brake pressure This brake pressure will not be noticed by the driver The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes Rain Brake Support Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors It only functions when the windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode it does not function in the intermittent mode When Rain Brake Support is active there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes a
59. be badly burned by steam or boiling tAUHON coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer CAUTION ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads 260 pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the 260 and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealership for service ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster NW 120m NN C Fuel Economy ACC Vehicle id Trip Info 041040876 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e Radio Info Fuel Economy Vehicle Speed Trip Info e Tire Pressure Vehicle Info Stored Warning Messages Turn Menu OFF 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The system allows the driver to select informatio
60. by an authorized dealer ACG FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor 56789 mi 032433104 ACC FCW Unavailable Warning Precautions While Driving With ACC In certain driving situations ACC may have detection issues In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpect edly The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene Adding A Trailer Hitch The weight of a trailer hitch may affect the performance of ACC If there is a noticeable change in performance following the installation of a trailer hitch or if the ACC performance does not return to normal after removing the trailer hitch see your authorized dealer Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly Turns And Bends In turns or bends ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too late or too early This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly Give extra attention in curves and be ready to apply the brakes if necessary Be sure to select an appropriate speed while driving in curves ACC may occasionally provide braking and or a driver alert that you consider unnecessary This may be the system s response to signs guardrails and other station ary objects in a curve This may also occur at the base of
61. call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 532 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler
62. can replace rock with any of the satellite music 2 You can replace 80 s on 8 with any other satellite types station name received by the radio 5 Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 Uconnect Hands Free Music Control These Commands Gan be spoken when playing mesit from your 3b cand USE dewre Gb or iPod after pushing the Uconnect voice command button qe VR on the steering wheel Radio will play the album Ragtime Favorites Radio will play the Radio will play the Audio Book Dr Ramo will pay Podcast Weekly Auta Podrast Radio will play Radio will play thre Radio will play he Artist Scott Song Maple Leaf ede al the Playlist Party Anplin Rag Times Jekyll and Mr ark 7B Hyde 030563046 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE 3 Playlist Podcast and audio book commands are only 1 You can replace the album artist song genre playlist available when the iPod is connected and playing podcast and audio book names with any corresponding i i i 4 VR commands Albums Artists and Genre names are names on the current device that is playing based on the music database provided by Gracenote 2 You can replace 8 with any track on the CD that is currently playing Command is only available when CD is playing 5 Available Voice Commands are shown in bo
63. child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 For center seating position route the tether strap over the seatback and adjustable headrest with the headrest in the full down position then attach the hook to the tether anchor located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window 022637851 Adjustable Headrest Downward Position Adjustable Headrest Release Push Button 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle NOTE e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the WARNING opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap e When using the LATCH attaching s
64. collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage then move it up or down to the position that fits you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as po
65. condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your NS TA TING AND OPERATING 405 vehicle If your vehicle has t
66. does not exist in the phonebook Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and for John Smith underlined in the gray shaded boxes e You can replace Mobile with Home Work or Other General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e You can replace Incoming Calls with Outgoing Calls or Missed Calls e Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect system is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone supports messaging over Bluetooth e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation e You can replace 4 with any message number shown on the screen 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Phone 8 4 8 4N Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 Nav Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone Uconnect Phone supports the following features Voice Activated Features e Hands F
67. e Engine overspeed protection is achieved through fuel cut off at or near redline e This mode will provide aggressive shifting and is intended for spirited driving SPORT MODE This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled dampening system This system reduces body roll and pitch in many driving situations including cornering acceleration and braking There are two modes of opera tion e Automatic Auto Mode This is the default position when vehicle ignition is first turned on This mode will give a sporty but comfortable ride Within this mode the suspension will adapt to the vehicle inputs includ ing vehicle speed steering inputs braking and accel eration e Sport Mode This mode is driver selectable when the vehicle is placed in SPORT mode press the CON TROLS button and then the SPORT button on the display screen This mode will set suspension for maximum performance handling and is intended for spirited driving NOTE The SPORT setting will provide a firmer ride SP d 3 SPORT Mode When SPORT mode is enabled a flag will light up in the instrument cluster Refer to Instrument Cluster Descrip tion in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information STARTING AND OPERATING 373 AUTO mode will be a more soft touring ride where as SPORT will be a firmer sportier suspension for better handling SPORT mode also affects transmission shifting in either Auto or Manua
68. ede Praes AE ee ha 241 ike Drake so oe fea Re RS RED eo bee en 378 asse LIEDE fue oe hart d BEE AO x rot a achat 200 Pedals Adjustable is ak seek RR 212 Pele TC 81 Placard Tire and Loading Information 397 Power Deck Lid Release usan eased eames oa es 39 Distribution Center Fuses 492 495 Door LOCkS rr 29 MO Er 97 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 264 o A 178 viu REKEN VS EES HER ER OAR 377 DUMIOOr 2468445625 gau ae dodi oo es 261 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 209 ihn nee eins ER AE HAAS ERROR DEEP RE 36 N INDEX 551 Power eet Eli ua xc decr Eos REELE RR S 507 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 92 Pretensioners oin C he OE ERROR ED EE P ol Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry sis ste seas sa 20 Radial Ply DOS beoor oie een eie ThE ER RS Rd 404 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 479 Radio Operation soca volente n race DE rtr praes 99 Kain Sensitive Wiper System se vss eed ee 207 Roar GCamietd PP 249 ear CUP HORIBI srani sag Un aes mi oe eee d 271 Kear Park Sense System 2 44 4 54445544 HR ad 241 Kear eat FOS sos dosi e d ics ee do d dre A Re e Ro 188 Rear Window Defroster lessen 276 Rear Window Features aoo RE Re ER eA 276 Rearview MUTO woes tx IEEE PI ERES 94 Recorder Event Data 234 Ret SERA 69 Recreational TOWNE 2 3 3 369 55 aot 445s HE 431 Retormulated Gasoline ss ss HER HR KERR e 422 Reo oase tapas a UR Gare da
69. filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Battery Location MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467 81342982 468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is a corrosiv
70. fog heavy rain heavy snow sleet heavy traffic and complex driving situations Normal fixed speed cruise control mode is for cruis e g in highway construction zones ing at a constant preset speed For additional informa When entering a tum lane or highway off ramp tion refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control when driving on roads that are winding icy Mode in this section snow covered slippery or have steep uphill or downhill slopes When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed NOTE The system will not react to preceding vehicles Always be aware of the mode selected You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons The two control modes function differently Always confirm which mode is selected Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation The speed control buttons located on the right side of the steering wheel operates the ACC system 1 DISTANCE SETTING 2 RES 3 SET 4 CANCEL 5 ON OFF 6 MODE NOTE Any chassis suspension modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h When the sy
71. for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label etc 022641517 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC air bags may offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side 022641453 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 The system includes side impact sensors that are cali brated to deploy th
72. for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufac turer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacturer Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 12 mile 0 8 km NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instruc tions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Continued 412 STARTING AND OPERATING Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer sug gest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedul
73. from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 8 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of I v an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 CAUTION 9 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 10 Fuel Door Reminder The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could SIC E TUCE economy mE Savane Hie ME ed Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the flashing severe catalytic converter damage and uy vehicle power loss will soon occur Immediate service is eaae 11 Fuel Gauge 4 The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced 12
74. identification number VIN is also located on the right front strut tower inside the engine compart ment INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING ues Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or death NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS HA Word About Your Keys 12 O Keyless Ignition Node KIN 12 od de 2 24 dg ayes au ER EE EE a 13 O Ignition Or Accessory On Message 14 W Sentry Key EE EE OR N 15 E Replacement Keys 2 2 2644 RS RTT ES 16 O Customer Key Programming 17 O General Information 222 c9 be rege 17 ll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped O Rearming Of The System o To Arm The System o To Disarm The System ue doe scr ee RE Bi illuminated Entry If Equipped ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE D To Unlock The Doors o To Lock The Doors O To Unlatch The Trunk 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee E Using The Panic Alari sie esr etae s 22 O Programming Additional Transmitters 29 O Transmitter Battery Replacement 23 O General Information 24 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 25 O How io Use Remote Start iii ec seas 25 lg Door Locks ES eese 28 B Manual Door LOCK
75. in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical conditions must exer cise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures espe cially if used for long periods Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This feature allows the brake accelerator and clutch pedals if equipped to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The switch is located on the front side of the driver s seat cushion side shield UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control sys tem is on The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In formation System EVIC if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out Adjust able Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged
76. in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature NOTE e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxi mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature e The Ignition Off time is programmable using the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are three 12 Volt 13 Amps electrical power outlets on this vehicle The power outlets are protected by a fuse N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265 Insert a cig
77. in the number e Voice Commands Dial by Saying a Number Call by Saying a Phonebook Name Redial or Call Back e Mobile Phonebook N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 e Recent Call Log NOTE All of the above operations except Redial can be done with 1 call or less active Dial By Saying A Number e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Dial 248 555 1212 e The Uconnect Phone will dial 248 555 1212 Call By Saying A Phonebook Name e Press the S button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call John Doe Mobile e The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated with John Doe or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe Call Controls The touch screen allows you to control the following call features e Answer e End e Ignore e Hold unhold Mute unmute e Transfer the call to from the phone e Swap 2 active calls e Join 2 active calls together Touch Tone Number Entry e Touch the Phone soft key e Touch the Dial soft key 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE i e The Touch Tone screen will be displayed e Use the numbered soft keys to enter the number and touch Call To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition VR press the EVR button while in a call and say 1234 or you can say Send Voicemail Pas
78. is present Whenever an audible alert is re quested the radio is also muted Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always requests the chime NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems NOTE The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used Astronomy Zone System Temporarily Unavailable When the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC will display the message Blind spot system unavailable Astronomy zone The side mirrors LED s will be lit up and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone Uconnect Phone 4 3 Uconnect Touch 4 3 Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone Uconnect Phone supports the following features Voice Activated features e Hands Free dialing via Voice Call John Smiths Mo bile or Dial 248 555 1212 e Redialing last dialed numbers Redial e Calling Back the last incoming call number Call Back e View Call logs on screen Show incoming calls Show Outgoing calls Show missed Calls Sho
79. is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 19 O D Overdrive OFF Indicator Light O D This light will illuminate when the O D OFF button has been selected and overdrive has been turned off 20 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information 21 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera WARNING ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range others could
80. it is worn extender should be used only if the existing belt is not low and snug and in the recommended seating posi long enough When it is not required remove the ex tions Remove and store the extender when not tender and store it needed 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers In addition the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column 022641324 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger 2 Knee Bolster Advanced Front Air Bags 3 Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag NOTE These air bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensor
81. main menu Vehicle Speed Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Speed displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the SELECT button to display the current speed in mph or km h Pressing the SELECT button a second time will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km h NOTE Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the EVIC 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Trip Info Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Trip Info displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press and release the UP DOWN but tons until one of the following Trip functions displays in the EVIC e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the ON RUN position To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable functions pres
82. message type are Memory System Un available Not in Park and Automatic High Beams On The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right amber telltales in the middle and red telltales on the left EVIC White Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell tales These telltales include e Shift Lever Status The shift lever status PR N D L 6 5 4 3 2 1 are dis played indicating the shift lever position Telltales 6 5 4 3 2 1 indicate the Electronic Range Select ERS fea ture has been engaged and the gear selected is displayed For further information on ERS refer to Starting And Operating e Electronic Speed Control ON This light will turn on when the electronic O speed control is ON For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Electronic Speed Control SET This light will turn on when the electronic O speed control is SET For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC ON This light will turn on when the ACC is ON R For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC SET This light will turn on when the ACC is SET Fens For further information refer to
83. necessary Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 514 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter LJ Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate tires filter L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner J Rotate tires filter and replace if necessary I Inspect the rear axle fluid Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order
84. or the safety of others bility Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 383 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that include Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS and the Electronic Stability Control ESC All four of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving condi tions Also your vehicle is equipped with Hill Start Assist HSA Ready Alert Braking and Rain Brake Support Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau lic brake pressure This prevents wheel lock up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase t
85. pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE message and a graphic showing the pres sure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing STARTING AND OPERATING 417 Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recom mended cold placard pressure inflation value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system Ju mm will automatically update the graphic display in the FM EVIC will stop flashing and the TPM Telltale Light will emm turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to s d 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the un 3 1 I 1 TPMS to receive this information E Z NN e 819793fc 418 STARTING AND OPERATING Service TPMS Warning rwr m BEER If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will Lag 8 WII E flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 81979401 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 419 If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no l
86. range PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade ee STARTING AND OPERATING 365 WARNING WARNING Continued e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever rearward with the brake pedal released after you have placed it in PARK Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re
87. roll NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position ENGINE START STOP Button Functions With Driver s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position The ENGINE START STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFE ACC RUN and START To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps e Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position e Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVIC displays ACC e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a second time to change the ignition switch to the RUN position EVIC displays RUN 360 STARTING AND OPERATING M e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time WARNING Continued to return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC displays OFF e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C transmission cannot be started this way Unburned To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once an externally powered electric engine block heater avail the engine has started ignit
88. temperature is running hot This may occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire Oil Change Due Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Due message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START S
89. the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure t
90. the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movemen
91. the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the trans mission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle 368 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recre ational Towing
92. the engine oil and engine oil filter LJ Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate tires filter L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner Rotate tires filter and replace if necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs mE Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if Replace the air conditioning filter necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the CV joints Adjust parking brake on vehicles Inspect the exhaust system equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 521 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires _J Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature
93. the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in an accident the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In an accident people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of an accident best Continued 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in an accident much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe t
94. the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow ice and dirt road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects bum per stickers bicycle racks etc The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible chime alert and reducing the radio volume Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points side rear front while driving to see if an alert is necessary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries Entering From The Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle Side Monitoring 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Entering From The Rear Overtaking Traffic Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative of less
95. tinue to operate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK 3 Turn the engine OFF 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required 370 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive fifth gear The transmission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the follow ing conditions are present e the shift lever is in the DRIVE position e vehicle speed is sufficiently high and e the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator AUTOSTICK Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or Console Mounted Shifter AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature that offers manual ge
96. to unlock all the doors or use the RKE transmitter e Memory Linked to FOB Touch the Memory Linked to FOB soft key to change this display This feature provides automatic driver seat po sitioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle driver 1 and driver 2 last mode settings and presets Io make your selection touch the Memory Linked to FOB soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Passive Entry Keyless Enter N Go Touch the Passive Entry soft key to change this display This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection touch the Passive Entry soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Heated Seats e Auto Heated Seats Touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C To make your selection touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key and select ON or OFF
97. trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant
98. use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentra tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of Continued such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance ee STARTING AND OPERATING 425 NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con eae WARNING Continued trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow t
99. voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in your favorites phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Far End Audio Performance e Audio guality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows dry weather conditions and operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can general
100. vomiting Consult a physician immediately Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT A Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT 1 Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle s Hazard Warning flashers 2 Verify that the valve stem on the wheel with the deflated tire is in a position that is near to the ground This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses 6 and 7 to reach the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding 3 Place the transmission in PARK auto transmission or in Gear manual transmission and turn Off the ignition 4 Set the parking brake N WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 441 B Setting Up To Use TIREFIT 1 Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to the Sealant Mode position 2 Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose 3 Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire 4 Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 onto the valve stem 5 Uncoil the Power Plug 8 and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet NOTE Do not remove foreign objects e g screws or nails from the tire C Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated Tire e Always start the eng
101. you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command period e Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee e low road noise e Even though international dialing for most number mead aura combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported fully cl a MAGN e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be e dry weather condition compromised with the convertible top down e Even though the system is designed for users speaking Far End Audio Performance in North American English French and Spanish ac WM e Audio quality is maximized under cents the system may not always work for some e When navigating through an automated system such EO DIE SEHR as voice mail or when sending a page before speaking e low to medium vehicle speed the digit stri k t Send j e digit string make sure to say Sen e low road noise e Storing names in your favorites phonebook when the PEE A E vehicle is not in motion is recommended fully cl i e Phonebook Mobile and Favorites name recognition S OSE AE rate is optimized when the entries are not similar e dry weather conditions and e You can say O letter O for 0 zero e operation from the driver s seat N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 e Performance s
102. 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status 032737803 Park Assist Ready D 1 fame Let sich Gis iiL 1 Ok i m t 032737807 Park Assist System Off The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a one half second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 Slow Tone 032737804 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Fast Tone 032737805
103. 234 or you can say Send Voicemail Password if Voicemail password is stored in your mobile phonebook 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Recent Calls You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the following call types 68 qf FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out up f2 Recent calls gt All Calls pd AL SJ Ana Conda a7 Axel Schweiss n Buddy s Pizza Incoming Calls Outgoing tralies X 248 990 6543 xX James Buttler 2 gt D Dennett e Incoming Calls e Outgoing Calls e Missed Calls e All Calls These can be accessed by touching the recent calls soft key on the Phone main screen You can also press the amp button and say Show my incoming calls from any screen and the Incoming calls will be displayed NOTE Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing Recent or Missed Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To ignore the call touch the Ignore soft key on the touch screen You can also touch the answer soft key or touch the blue caller ID box N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you
104. A Front Fog Lamp If Equipped PSX24W Front Side loud 5 cen ROOMS ben ae di 168 Rear Tad Lamp os7246c0nb50n6s beeen ote x EED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear Stop Tum L mp s se serii m m LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Reat ide WMiaiker sos asus ead ER PER tiiat ag 168 Backup Lamp sauce etur Ru ys ches ea eges 9157 Center High Mount Stop Lamp CHMSL LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer LICENSE cu eu es ek AS A P E aes OA Ps 168 BULB REPLACEMENT Front Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp And Side Marker Lamp Models With Halogen Headlamps 1 Open the hood NOTE Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle 2 Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun terclockwise and then pull it out of the headlamp assembly 502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head lamp assembly and then turn it clockwise Front Low Beam Headlamp And Park Turn Lamp Models With High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID HID Headlamps The headlamps are a type
105. ANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your operational you may reach the emergency number as chances of successfully making a phone call as to that follows for the mobile phone directly e Press the button to begin WARNING e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call Emergency or Dial Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico Your phone must be turned on and connected to the Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the mobile phone has network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect Phone NOTE e The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the Towing Assistance touch screen If you need towing assistance e The emergency number dialed is based on the country e Press the Ne button to begin where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e The towing assistance call may also be initiated by touch e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the count
106. ATING 395 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing zits the tire size two di ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 396 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Terminology And Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is define
107. ATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Changing the FCW status to the Near setting allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This setting provides less reaction time than the Far setting which allows for a more dynamic driving experience Changing the FCW status to Off prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you NOTE e In the Off setting FCW OFF will be displayed on the Uconnect Touch display e The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down e FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as over head objects ground reflections objects not in the path of the car stationary objects that are far away oncom ing traffic or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed e FCW will be disabled like ACC below with the un available screens FCW Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error there may be a temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions FCW will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating FCW again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 Service FCW Warning If the system turns off and t
108. Authorized Service Center 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 522 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service 114 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter H Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter Replace the engine air cleaner filter Rotate tires Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper
109. B Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC Front and Side Impact Sensors Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB may e No objects should be placed over or near the air b he provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant ag on ine instrument peus because en such during a side impact The SAB is marked with an air bag objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a As label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers
110. CONTROL DRIVE BRAAF r jj TOW Ut m gt b HAUL BATTERY HEATED MRHOR WWOSHELD INSTRUMENT PAWEL SEAT BELT SLENG DOUe TE AR CONDITIONING CHILO SEAT NECOCAMION WA DATWC TOW MALI CHARGING DETROST ILLUMINATION TERR ANCOR SUTTON E N 4 66 A W Cu br NS J w A Low URE ANON ANOHOSE GLOW PLUG POWER WMDSHIELO WEER JUE ARBAG ARNa sua 0008 MOONMELT MAZANI FOUR EEL STEERING FUIN AND WASHER CHLOREN LU LATCH BIITTON ORWE LOW SRS N id A c CY e aE amsaa AV Aa SS p 1i PUSH as MALFUNCTION ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL FASSENGER DOOR ALAR COWVERTIELE Cole SEE OWNERS Am ELECTRONIC INDICATOR LIGHT on Tema TEMPERATUPE RESTWANTSYSTEM AMAAG OFF Tor DOWN MANUAL SO CONDGIONER CONTROL OFF 010533317 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title 010805185 VIN Location The vehicle
111. Canadian Gate Operator Programming Step 2 and follow all remaining steps The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device i e garage door opener gate opera tor security system entry door lock home office light ing etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Troubleshooting Tips WARNING If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal trans ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door to complete the training for a Rolling Code opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes e Replace the battery in the original hand held transmit ten e Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without If you have any problems or require assistance please these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 c
112. Climate Control Functions A C Air Conditioning The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When the air conditioning system is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin For improved fuel economy press the A C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings NOTE e For Manual Climate Controls if the system is in Mix Floor or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows e If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed e If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser lo cated in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or GS high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the ve
113. Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 515 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 Replace the engine air cleaner filter L1 Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 516 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 42 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter
114. EDR 69 Outside The Vehicle 86 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node KIN Keyless Enter N Go Feature This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature refer to Starting Procedure in Starting And Operating for further information Keyless Ignition Node KIN This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment The Keyless Ignition Node KIN has four operating positions three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position The three positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The fourth position is START during start RUN will illuminate NOTE In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button the RKE transmitter Key Fob may have a low or dead battery In this situation a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch Put the nose side side opposite of the emergency key of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch Keyless Ignition Node KIN 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob also contain
115. Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer N FYOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 533 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian go
116. HE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267 WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 072736519 Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 12 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel amp Power Outlet Console Rear 2 38 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest 268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw e Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting CUPHOLDERS Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers Front Seat Cupholders vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Continued only Do not hang any type of a
117. IPERS AND WASHERS The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position The lever is located on the left side of the steering column D31563088 Windshield Wiper Washer Control Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to the first detent position and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are four delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km h or less Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee CAUTION Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the wind shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than off Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column and hold it for as long as washer spray is desir
118. IT If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the EVIC displays CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remain ing steps 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wis
119. If there are no phones currently paired a pop up will appear If you select Yes you will go the Paired Phones screen if you select No you will return to the Uconnect Phone main menu 2 At the Paired Phones screen press the Add Device soft key and a pop up with instructions will appear N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 2 Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled mobile phone When prompted on the phone select the Uconnect device and enter the PIN 4 When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take prece dence over other paired phones within range Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device Touch the Player hard key to begin Press the Source soft key Change the Source to Bluetooth Touch the Add Device soft key Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled Audio Device When prompted on the device select the Uconnect device and enter the PIN e Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting e When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device Selecting Yes will make this device the highest priority This device w
120. Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat the TIREFIT kit source Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place provided Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1 4 in 6 mm or larger If the tire has any sidewall damage If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure Continued If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire If the wheel has any damage Continued 440 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Continued e Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come in contact with hair eyes or clothing TIRE FIT is harmful if inhaled swallowed or absorbed through the skin It causes skin eye and respira tory irritation Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin Change clothing as soon as possible if there is any contact with clothing TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex In case of an allergic reaction or rash consult a physician immediately Keep TIREFIT out of reach of chil dren If swallowed rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water Do not induce
121. Miles 230 000 km or 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 138 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter LJ Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate tires filter L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner J Rotate tires filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 525 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or 150 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 Replace the engine air cleaner filter L1 Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Dat
122. N Do not use gasolines containing Methanol or E 85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E 85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol it does not have the negative effects of methanol ee STARTING AND OPERATING 423 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond g
123. N OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator light in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE e The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button e The Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a different size tire is installed on one wheel such as the compact spare tire if equipped To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM To Resume Spee
124. NDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 Compass Settings e Variance Touch the Variance soft key to change this display Com pass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differ ences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the dif ferences and provide the most accurate compass head ing NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 4 040506040 Compass Variance Map e Calibration Touch the Calibration soft key to change this setting This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M calibrate the compass by touching the ON soft key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such
125. NG THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control ACC increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways However it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control ACC utilizes a radar sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you NOTE e If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you ACC will maintain a fixed set speed e If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration not to exceed the original set speed automatically to maintain a preset following distance while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM WARNING WARNING Continued e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC is a convenience e The ACC syst
126. O REEDE IEE INTRODUCTION 944 5445 5055 04 084064 S04 ee DR THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING 22 2 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENTS B Introduction B How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Modifications Alterations INTRODUCTION Mi Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION See INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high guality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acguaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares a
127. O Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped With 60 40 O Rear Seat Cupholders sss 271 Split Folding Rear Seat ses EER n en 274 ke PP m 272 M Rear Window Features cies E Glovelos IDEO oa 3t 9S ELE a dde a 242 EIE Oe O Console Features sas RE 3 272 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you This feature will be defaulted on and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse 030407085 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 030436523 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger s
128. OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 NOTE Barge In Overriding Prompts e The first number encountered for that contact will be The amp v amp button can be used when you wish to skip part sent All other numbers entered for that contact will be of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately ignored For example if a prompt is asking There are 2 numbers with the name John Say the full name you could press the EVR button and say John Smith to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time prompt out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal Voice Response Length It is possible for you to choose between Brief and e Pauses wait or other characters that are supported by Detailed Voice Response Length some phones are not supported over Bluetooth These additional symbols will be ignored in the dial ing a numbered sequence e Touch the More hard key then touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Display soft key then scroll down to Voice Response Length 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Select either Brief or Detailed by touching the box next to the selection A check mark will appear to show your selection Phone And Network Status Indicators Uconnect Phone will prov
129. OFF position The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E Engine Compartment 6 4L 392 HEMI 459 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII_ 460 N Emissions Inspection And Maintenance DOEANE ook a wees HEK beri op od ed a Se 460 W Replacement Parts 0004 462 W Dealer Service RE EE OE EE EN 462 Bl Maintenance Procedures 463 Bid iii 6 EE es aaa wae eae a N 464 HEREIN INCE so oo ou ae MED AA VER 466 O Engine Air Cleaner Pinter ws uo aces es eats N 466 H Maintenance Iree Battery ot ER EER a 467 O Air Conditioner Maintenance 469 AG Air Fillet 42 3229 Big A70 E Body Lubrication sam 13 REI RE RR o Windshield Wiper Blades OAdding Washer Fluid 24 zs oi Ries sa 473 O Exhaust Systemi o uar kar ERROR EERS A7A O Cooling System 14 92 442 ER PRAK 476 458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M E Pike DUSIOB so RES cee ee hone te ue EE 482 D Automatic Transmission 484 El Reat Axle or Eon RUS RR ee HERE N Redes 485 D Appearance Care And Protection From COMOSION ware uode ue are ep ee do dati di n id 486 MiFuses eeeeeeene 492 H Integrated Power Module 492 O Rear Power Distribution Center 495 M Vehicle Storage 000004 500 ll Replacement Bulbs B Bulb Replacement
130. OUR VEHICLE M Active Head Restraints Front Seats The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Active Head Restraints AHR In the event of a rear impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants head and the AHR The AHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact If the AHRs do not return to their normal position see your authorized dealer immediately To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint m 030907490 Push Button NOTE The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 WARNING Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death Rear Head Restraints The center rear head restraint has two positions up or down When the seat is being occupied the head restraint should raised When there are no occupants in the center seat position the head restraint can be lowered for maximum vi
131. Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T or S Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 394 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id EXAMPLE 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load LL Light load tire C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire ee STARTING AND OPER
132. Placard Location ad 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires 398 STARTING AND OPERATING M Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 399 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas
133. R Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 431 Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely b
134. Response Length It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed Voice Response Length e Touch the More soft key then touch the Settings soft key 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Touch the Display soft key then scroll down to Voice Response Length e Select either Brief or Detailed by touching the box next to the selection A check mark will appear to show your selection Phone And Network Status Indicators Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength and phone battery strength Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even thoug
135. S 222 9 RE REY 28 OPower Door Locks usce ences ocn ay ae s EUR CER 29 o Child Protection Door Lock System Rear DOCS MEER OON EET ET ERE 31 W Keyless Enter N Go 000 0005 32 OM Gl METER IE EE EE RE eens 36 O ower WNdOwWS se ex 3 edv p om Be eo Rene SR 36 O Wind Buffetng ue oos sae EE EE ak AR ER 99 W Trunk Lock And Release ee 39 W Trunk Safety Warning 4 40 O Irunk Emergency Release 422542242644 HE 41 W Occupant Restraints 000 41 El Lap Shoulder DENS ou iu Des Bi bc BR AE 43 O Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 48 O Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 49 o Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR IF POQUIPPCO ione ss 445 635545 OF oes Gs 49 O Energy Management Feature 50 NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 El Seat belt Pretemsioners eire tae sn ol AC Mld Restant ES SEWE RR RR RR pai 70 O Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System lBl Engine Break In Recommendations 81 BeltAlert ee EE nnne al Eie oux oen N N OE 82 2 H Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 22 O Transporting Passengers 82 ci Seat Belt Extender lt ca ede eReERuA as 53 o Exhaust Gas AE OO wh bas nds 82 E EN Ee B Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Bags eene pou Es oa oe REDE Si De ee eee eee ease 84 O Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls 62 3 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make O Event Data Recorder
136. SSISTANCE C lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire O Traction Grades ws uie emp Ee tuns TT Res 209 ay Grade s sop os DR REM DS RR Eb EI DES 235 LU Treadwear ixi DES SES HESS EO 535 Temperate Grades 6s adm soc VOR E re a 536 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 529 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services
137. Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If driver door first is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your
138. Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection touch the Hill Start Assist soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEE Lights e Headlight Off Delay Touch the Headlight Off Delay soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Illuminated Approach Touch the Illuminated Approach soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status touch the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlights With Wipers Touch the Headlights With Wipers soft key to change this display When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection touch the Hea
139. TING AND OPERATING Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the replaced tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to 055007576 1 Worn Tire follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure Z New tue You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death NS TA TING AND OPERATING 409 Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
140. TOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Fuel Economy Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Fuel Economy displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press and release the UP DOWN buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy func tions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode e Distance To Empty DTE e Miles Per Gallon MPG 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion Average Fuel Economy ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset NW 68 back 120mi AVG 9 3 hResel DTE 233mi MPG 20 40 041041516 Average Fuel Economy There is an ECO icon be
141. Tread Wear Indicators 29e RE 408 To Open Hood sis Gees ooo a Gee oe ene EE 194 die REED ER EE OE ET ee ee A31 Behind a Motorhome aana 431 Disabled Vehicle ls 453 Recreational eee 431 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome 431 Traction Con FOL ss sn ye aU Baer RP tre 383 Caley TOWNS ius ior ES AE eee a eee ee es 431 Transmission 2222 4644444524446 640646485 484 Automatic iese EE EER ae xs 362 363 484 Flid ones eae Meee ERROR a4 507 slo aoe ae Abd dee oa DE eee E 362 Transmitter Battery Service Remote keyless Entity sae ine rm o as 29 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless ENY usar buceo ae s 20 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 253 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Transport eS Ini wsGedd 9 BEER DR iE Eie d Tread Wear Indicators 556 INDEX M Taip OXHOBIBIGE cess 99 95 ERAS tone 3 93 3 beh 281 Trunk Lid Deck Lid 4 29455 seed ee hee AR Ex 39 41 Trunk Release Remote Control 39 Trunk Release Emergency 2 ncance ae ER Beds 41 Turm DISHES u aues READ SERE LA HR B Eo 199 281 WCTVCORNCCOL iese sain Uy eee pe ee 0 8 84 335 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 535 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 335 Universal Transmitter 0040 299 Unleaded Gasoline 0 0 000000 0G 421 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 48 bcne Mor AT EE AR EES 98 Vehicle Certification Label
142. VEHICLE ie CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat After cycling the ignition to the ON RUN position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 CAUTION Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the
143. VEHICLE M Modes Of Operation Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Blind Spot Alert When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object However when the system is operating in RCP the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio volume is reduced Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro priate side view mirror based on a detected object If the turn signal is then activated and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and de tected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audio alerts will be issued In addition to the audible alert the radio if on volume will be reduced NOTE e Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system the radio volume is reduced e If the hazard flashers are on the system will request the appropriate visual alert only When the system is in RCP the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object
144. Ventilated Seat amp Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start If Equipped When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C When tempera tures are above 80 F 26 7 C the driver vented seat will turn on To make your selection touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Engine Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options soft key the fol lowing settings will be available e Easy Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Easy Exit Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Engine Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes
145. a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes Press the switch once to select HI level heating Press the switch a second time to select LO level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF e The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate When the Hl level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal Hl level If the HlI level setting is selected the 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE system will automatically switch to LO level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LO level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes Ventilated Seats On some models both the driver and passenger seats are ventilated Located in the seat cushion and seatback are small fans that draw air from the seat surface through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient tempera tures The ventilated seats can be operated using the Uconnect Touch System Front Ventilated Seat Operation Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 Nav Press the Controls soft key located on the bottom of the Uconnect Touch display 10 10 NW 54 om We 72 5 4 1130 950
146. adlights On With Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through Uconnect Touch To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Unlatch The Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
147. afety amp Driving Assistance Lights NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a Hume Uconnect Touch 8 4 Soft Keys When making a selection press the soft key to enter the desired mode Once in the desired mode press and release the preferred setting until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been se lected N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or press the X soft key to close out of the settings screen Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft keys on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings Display After pressing the Display soft key the following settings will be available e Display Mode When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings Io change Mode status touch and release the Day Night or Auto soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Display Brightness With Headlights ON When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights on Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Display Brightness With Headlights OFF When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting an
148. akes s dans aet one 93392295 378 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 2404444042924 381 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cruise Control 217 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 478 DOCS Fuel 22a ws 3 9d AAR EG bas ages 426 Adding Washer PUI 222 064 9 0 50400 esc RR we 473 Dgenives Fuel bies ege sane ee RR IE noes 424 Adjustable Pedals a4 eint nes bee RR RE ges 212 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 466 Air Conditioner Maintenance 469 Air CondiUonIng FIGE s voee esp C 93d eoo as 350 470 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 469 470 Air Conditioning System 348 469 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 351 Air Pressure Tires 0 000000 0008 402 ie Levee onan EE OE ET rm 54 65 Abas Deployment ose dpeE rty MEE PIRE PR 66 Airbag Light ouod 846449554 oe SEP 63 69 84 285 Airbag Maintenance abd 3016 4 6 Renee ep dot s 68 uoto Xm 57 62 65 Airbag Window Side Curtain 58 62 65 Alarm S c rity Alarm x auum purs ARE DE MERE 17 Alarm LENE wastes ie EET S S FEES 286 Alarm System Security Alarm 17 Alarm Panie xx eR vx DROS TRES 22 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 381 383 Anti Lock Warming Light us eus p e sees 286 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 Antifreeze Engine Coolant vio acce EP ee HR 477 505 pron MERE ederr ORE 480 imped ESE ME eacus ence EIS DA
149. al Driver Side Knee Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR
150. alfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 e If the sensor is damaged due to a collision see your authorized dealer for service e Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor including transparent material or aftermarket grilles Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present the system will return to the Adaptive Cruise Control Off state and will resume function by simply reactivating it NOTE Installing a vehicle front end protector or an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recom mended Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC operation ACC Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error there may be a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions ACC will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating ACC again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Service ACC Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor it indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked
151. all toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for www HomeLink com for information or assistance safety information or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 General Information POWER SUNROOF IF EGUIPPED This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com pliance could void the user s authority to operate the device 034141878 Power Sunroof Switch e The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by
152. an Kardon audio system offers the ability to choose Logic 7 surround sound for any audio source The GreenEdge high efficiency speaker designs ensure the system has higher SPL and a dramatic increase in dy namic sound quality The speakers are tuned for maxi mum efficiency and perfectly matched to the amplifier output stage ensuring state of the art multi seat surround sound processing Logic7 multichannel surround sound technology deliv ers an immersive accurate sound stage to every seating position This surround effect is available for audio from any source AM FM CD Satellite Radio or dashboard AUX input and is activated through the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Surround Sound under Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel Selecting Audio Surround through the DSS modes activates the Harman Kardon Logic7 multichannel surround sound technology in your vehicle The Video Surround mode is described under Driver Selectable NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337 Surround DSS The Video Surround Mode will only be available for video media sources DVDs Video CDs or other video media supported by the radio Some audio will sound better in DSS modes others in Stereo mode When in Audio Surround mode balance is set auto matically Fader control is available in surround mode but should be set to the center position for optimal surround performance
153. an air bag system Continued made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat includ ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities contact your autho rized dealer N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in a collision The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately e The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on for approximately four to eight seconds when the ignition is first cycled to ON RUN e The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the approximate four to eight second interval e The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your prote
154. and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow ing licenses United States 644 664 ka ts MRXC4W4MA4 Canada 2546A C4W4MA4 STARTING AND OPERATING 421 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 6 4L Engine The 6 4L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excel lent fuel economy and performance when using high quality premium unleaded 800dfab8 gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or higher RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD 9 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However conti
155. ar lighter or accessory plug into the power outlets for use to ensure proper operation NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used CAUTION e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position Front Power Outlet WARNING Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicles not equipped with the ash receiver tray A fire leading to bodily injury could result 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The center console outlet is powered directly from the There is also a 12 volt power outlet located on the back of battery power available at all times Items plugged into the center console for rear passengers This power outlet this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent the has power available only when the ignition is placed in engine from starting the ACC or RUN position Center Console Power Outlet Rear Center Console Power Outlet UNDERSTANDING T
156. ar shifting to provide you with more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking and improve overall vehicle perfor mance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situa tions Operation When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between the five available gears To engage AutoStick simply move the shift lever to the right or left while in the DRIVE position or press one of the steering wheel mounted shift paddles When AutoStick is active the current transmission gear is displayed in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC portion of the instrument cluster In AutoStick mode the transmission will shift when manually selected by the driver using the shift lever or the shift paddles unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho sen except as described below ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 e The transmission will automatically downshift as the e An UPSHIFT message will appear in the Electronic vehicle slows to prevent engine lugging and will Vehicle Information Center EVIC portion of the in display the current gear strument cluster when using AutoStick to alert the driver to upshift to the next
157. ard keys and soft keys NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 Press the Settings hard key to access the Settings screen use the Page Up Down soft keys to scroll through the settings following settings Touch the desired setting soft key to Display change the setting using the description shown on the following pages for each setting Please Clock selecta setting Safety Assistance Exit Lights Uconnect Touch 4 3 Soft Keys Display e Brightness 044336003 Touch the Brightness soft key to change this display When in this display you may select display brightness with the headlights on and the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by 1 Uconnect Touch 4 3 Settings Hard Key 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Mode Touch the Mode soft key to change this display When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings To change Mode status press and release the Day Night or Auto soft key then by touch the arrow back soft key e Language Touch the Language soft key to change this display When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Touch the English French Fran ais
158. are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger air bag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Here are some tips on getting the most out
159. arts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution 362 STARTING AND OPERATING M AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING CAUTION e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate Damage to the automatic transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some thing Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing on the brake pedal vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle Continued spee
160. as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks did Audio e Equalizer Touch the Equalizer soft key to change this display When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting e Balance Fade Touch the Balance Fade soft key to change this display When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings e Speed Adjusted Volume Touch the Speed Adjusted Volume soft key to change this display This feature increases or decreases volume rela tive to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the OFF 1 2 or 3 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Surround Sound Touch the Surround Sound soft key to change this dis play This feature provides simulated surround sound NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 mode To make your selection press the Surround Sound soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Phone Bluetooth e Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Touch Supplement SIRIUS Setup e Channel Skip SIRIUS can be pr
161. as the vehicle is in REVERSE 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System When the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system is mal functioning the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SERVICE PARK ASSIST or the SERVICE PARK AS SIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a fault condition the EVIC will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SERVICE PARK ASSIST or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate If CLEAN PARK ASSIST appears in the EVIC make sure the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition If the message appears again see an authorized dealer If SERVICE PARK ASSIST or SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the EVIC see an authorized dealer Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense System Usage Precautio
162. ase the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away a sssest from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking Parking Brake brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise When the parking brake is applied with the ignition the load on the transmission locking mechanism may switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The the instrument cluster will illuminate parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle 380 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the sh
163. asoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT 424 STARTING AND OPERATING ee can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor SS ON Eon AE nia reformulated gasoline e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor Materials Added To Fuel mance and damage the emissions control system All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service Fuel System Cautions assistance CAUTION e The
164. ator pedal If you do not the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed If this occurs e The message DRIVER OVERRIDE will display in the EVIC 032433098 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 e The system will not be controlling the distance be To Cancel tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead The vehicle The system will disable ACC without erasing the speed will only be determined by the position of the memory if accelerator pedal e You softly tap the brake pedal e You depress the brake pedal 3 e You press the CANCEL switch e An Anti Lock Brake System ABS event occurs Driver Override e f the transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL men s o e The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys ACC 55 mph tem ESC TCS activates RI 0324439099 Driver Override 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC TCS off e You turn OFF the ignition ESC will automatically be re engaged To Resume Speed Press the RES button and release Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed Adaptive NOTE You can resume ACC from a minimum of Cruise Control 20 mph 32 km h WARNING The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit Resuming a set speed 032433400 that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and Cancelled m Adapti
165. ba dc d 470 Release Hood lees 194 Remineer Lie SOM e iced pos ups dst a eia 198 Reminder Seat Belt leen o1 Remote Control Daring SYSTE 2 es imde tri ERR ERES OAR EE 25 Remote Keyless Entry RKE is ss oce x m Se 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 337 Remot its siel aiu ddp PRED BEE dco 25 Remote link Release 3 220472 oe ERER 464545 44 54 99 Replacement BIDS se aeaea crair Hi RA MR DR 500 Replacement Keys 4424092466 ed xg AX ES 16 Replacement Fanie oi es hee ROS oe aoa Res 462 Replacement IBS s scis oni VERRE SEL ERRORS 409 Reporting Safety Detects 14e pia eke Rx D32 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 282 298 Restraint Head 0 0 0 00000 000008 185 552 INDEX NEE Id Restraints Child 4 lt lt 444444 468 4 s EE 70 Restraints Occupant s2444454 44 BREAD eee as 41 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 42 224 prs 450 Rotation Tires suo ac x Room beoe res 412 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 84 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 86 Safety Defects Reporting ci chs a em ehe es 532 Safety Information JG seven 9 we ote oo dees 392 Datel IDS EA OE eee alana a OES 82 oale ExXhglct Gas sinc So desea UP Pee d 82 Schedule Maintenance leen 510 Seat Belt Maintenance uua chus er cmd s 491 Seat Belt Reminder se a4 395 exu ER doe SE d 5I Seat Belts 2 0 00 00 cee ee ee 41 43 84 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 48 And Pregnant Wo
166. been driven 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the EVIC displauy It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE e You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK e The highest available transmission gear is displayed in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC whenever the Electronic Range Select ERS feature is active Use the selector on the shi
167. bol will display until the trunk is closed N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Trunk Emergency Release As a security measure a trunk internal emergency release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow in the dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism Trunk Emergency Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and 2 all passengers Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen ger e Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupant 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event e All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat
168. bout your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 N DEERE EEA ELECTRONIC STABILITY WATER IN FUEL REAR ABNDOW WINOSME D WIPER EXTERION PULS AKH BEAM TURN SIGMALS 3 oy pe ELECTRON PROGRAM BRAKE WEER INTERMITTENT FAILURE EPEED CONTROL ay eg 5s on ZO e oO 1 FUEL REAR WINDOW WWDSHELO MASTER LIGHTING Seen UPPER AO LOWER HEATED BEAT WINDOW LIFT VRE PRESEURE WEL BERENT wisi ARINC WTERMETTENT WIPER WASHER Serr HIGH eee sore C KR a 0575aJ52 93 29 LI FUEL FILL SEE FEAR WINDOW WDSHIELD WASHER DUWE LIGHT FRONT POS UGNT HOOO RELEASE LOWER fun ALL WHEEL HARMSE OF AM LUR WASHER FLUID LEVEL DOW DONN Eoo roe MI DAWE ERAXING SYSTEM Y 200 QE ET fe JA awo BRAKE me UFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC ERANE SYSTEM ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW CLOCTRICALL PAIK LIGHTS KLAR FOG LAMP AND LIFTGATE UESMUSI AND VENTLATWEFAN WW OW LOCH THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WATS PARKING DEFRIIST HEATED GEN LOWER AR QUTLET
169. button and release The EVIC will display the set speed NOTE You must observe the display when setting or changing speed not the speedometer To Vary The Speed Setting There are two ways to change the set speed e Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the desired speed and press the SET button e Tap the RES or SET button to increase or decrease the set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments respec tively Hold the RES or SET button for 5 mph 8 km h increments To Cancel The system will disable normal Cruise Control without erasing the memory if e You softly tap or depress the brake pedal e You press the CANCEL button 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee e The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates To Resume Press the RES button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if e You push and release the ON OFF button e You turn off the ignition e You switch off ESC If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated the system will return to the last driver setting ACC or Normal Cruise Control Forward Collision Warning If Equipped Forward Collision Warning FCW warns the driver of a potential collision with the vehicle in front of you and prompts the driver to take action in order to avo
170. by an authorized dealer e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this flammable and can explode injuring you Other time unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C Syst
171. call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automati cally This is cell phone dependent Redial e Press the Redial soft key e or press the amp button and after the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone Uconnect Phone Features Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows Press the amp button to begin After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to
172. call the emergency number This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and connected to the Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the mobile phone has network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect Phone Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the Se button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This m
173. ccessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the center console UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269 035135226 Retractable Cover Front Cupholders 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM Heated and Cooled Cupholders If Equipped Press the Cold symbol once to turn on the cupholder Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled press the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off cupholders The cupholders are designed to help keep Press the Hot symbol once to activate the cupholder warm beverages warm and cold beverages cool press the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder WARNING When using the cupholder in the Heat position avoid contact with the heated portion of the cup holder in order to reduce the possibility of burns Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injuries medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise par ticular care in order to prevent serious burn injury Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects when operated in the Heat position Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches Rear Seat Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats The cupholders are positioned forward
174. ccurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti Lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e The clicking sound of solenoid valves e Brake pedal pulsations and 382 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id e Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end WARNING Continued of the stop e e The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys These are all normal characteristics of ABS ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase WARNING braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and e The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip tires or the traction afforded ment that may be susceptible to interference The ABS cannot prevent collisions including caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capa those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety
175. cessary for your protection in all acci dents and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the ON RUN position If the key is in the OFF position or in the ACC position the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi PN mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru 2 ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after yo
176. ch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite Touch the Settings hard key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Select a different Phone or Audio Device then the e currently connected device e At the Options pop up screen touch the Make Favor ite soft key you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect e website for supported phones e To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook e follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previou
177. cle with the front passenger air bag unless the air bag is turned off An air bag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower An chors and Tether for CHildren LATCH All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who
178. contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze solution Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended ma
179. control to Floor A If it s sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 4 In very cold weather if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control to Mix LS or Defrost yd Sg as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 045636890 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS li Starting Procedures 807 D Automatic Transmission 907 HKevless Enter N GO 4 2 eaae foe ar OE bo Ses 358 O Normal Skatte see Ke eek eee ee seas 358 D Extreme Cold Weather below 20 F Or 29 C ETER ER TED 360 o If Engine Fails To Start 5 92x x axe eed 360 BI ATIS AOE sos see EARR ER 361 N Engine Block Heater If Equipped 361 Bl Automatic Transmission H Key Ignition Park Interlock O Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System O Five 5peed Automatic Transmission sie RIN ES ca se eoe ER EE EE EN is ARE OE EE EE N O Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or Console Mounted Shifter W Sport Mode REP 354 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Bl Driving On Slippery Surfaces 373 mP eeoloid EN ow acest Gee ona DY RE OR bea AR 210 VIACOM s ae aru E OOR EDE R N DS 374 N Driving Through Water 374 E Plowing Rising Water bear OES eee aka s 375 O Shallow Standing Water o ydo Mi Power Steering 05 377 d Power Steeri
180. coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE e Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur e Automatic Temperature Controls ATC will automati cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow
181. creen 3 Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device e The options pop up will be displayed Touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Touch the Settings soft key Touch to select the particular Phone or the Paired S Audio Sources soft key and then an Audio Device Jouets Sobre MOD piter e Touch the soft key located to the right of the device name for a different Phone or Audio Device than the Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Disconnecting A Phone or Audio Device currently connected device e Touch the Settings soft key e The options pop up will be displayed e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Touch the Delete Device soft key e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite Touch the Settings soft key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Touch the soft key located to the right of the device name The options pop up will be displayed Touch the Make Favorite soft key you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth
182. cted the horn will chirp when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Remote Door Unlock Order Touch the Remote Door Unlock Order soft key to change this display When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On Ist Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry and the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors On 1st Press all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if Unlock Driver Door Only On Ist Press is programmed NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If Unlock Driver Door Only On ist Press is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used
183. ction Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the
184. ctive The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation a The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the ee Electronic Stability Control ESC is off OFF STARTING AND OPERATING 391 Synchronizing ESC If the power supply is interrupted battery 5 disconnected or discharged the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light may illuminate with the engine running If this should occur turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light should go out However if the light remains on have the ESC and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible 392 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 1
185. cture and to leave a number on a pager N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries For example if you previously created a Phone book entry with First and or Last Name as Voicemail Password then if you press the EvR button and say Send Voicemail Password the Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e The first number encountered for that contact will be sent All other numbers entered for that contact will be ignored e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature e Pauses wait or other characters that are supported by some phones are not supported over Bluetooth These additional symbols will be ignored in the dial ing a numbered sequence Barge In Overriding Prompts The amp vr button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking There are 2 numbers with the name John Say the full name you could press the EVR button and say John Smith to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Voice
186. d Five Speed Automatic Transmission The shift lever position display located in the instrument panel cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the PARK position refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position 364 STARTING AND OPERATING ee The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears The console mounted shift lever provides PARK RE VERSE NEUTRAL DRIVE and AutoStick shift posi tions Once the shifter is in DRIVE tapping the shift lever side to side or pressing the paddle shifters will place the vehicle in AutoStick AutoStick allows for manual shift control refer to AutoStick in this sec tion While in AutoStick the transmission gear position will be displayed in the EVIC Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear
187. d Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 363 WARNING Continued e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and turn the engine OFF When the ignition is in the OFF position the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK before the engine can be turned off This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK This system also locks the shift lever in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock BTSI system that holds the shift lever in the PARK position unless the brakes are applied To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be presse
188. d To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal N UNDERSTANDI
189. d as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pres sure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure Pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures STARTING AND OPERATING 397 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Tire And Loading Information Placard Location ET TE jc RIE PAS CENTS SRE NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed Sa la on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door P195 70R14 T125 70D15 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle Tire
190. d properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occu pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or h
191. d to prevent loss of coolant and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces 480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Id WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the en
192. d washer solvent and add if required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 512 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M Once a Month At Each Oil Change e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or e Change the engine oil filter damage e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake Failure to perform the required maintenance items master cylinder and power steering add as needed may result in damage to the vehicle e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct Required Maintenance Intervals operation Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 513 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter _J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if
193. dlights With Wipers soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Auto High Beams Touch the Auto High Beams soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection touch the Auto High Beams soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 e Daytime Running Lights Touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Steering Directed Lights Touch the Steering Directed Lights soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights turn relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel To make your selection touch the Steering Directed Lights soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Flash Headlights With Lock Touch the Flash Headlights With Lock soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter This feature ma
194. e Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 526 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your prd per SA Gas ERROR TETTETETT 529 O Prepare For The Appointment 529 df te dies Hi 46444 fevered apne ade DI 529 o Be Reasonable With Requests 529 N If You Need Assistance 529 H Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 530 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 530 Hn Medco Contactes sre x Ee AD RAS BL 530 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 531 H eve CONOCI 4 seai aa 6 we se se RE es 3 531 W Warranty Information 532 EM MOPARS Paris eene xd mex REEN 532 W Reporting Safety Defects 592 O In The 50 United States And Washington prop C O In Canada N Publication Order Forms 528 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER A
195. e N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349 e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Uconnect Touch System Set tings in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode Manual Operation The system allows for manual selection of blower speed air distribution mode A C status and recirculation con trol The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings A C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze
196. e for the proper main tenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed Tire Rotation Standard Tires The suggested rotation method is the side to side as shown in the following diagram 055705379 Tire Rotation Tire Rotation All Season Tires The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped with all season tires is the forward cross as shown in the following diagram ES mi c EXC EJ 055703771 Tire Rotation STARTING AND OPERATING 413 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is dr
197. e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Power Door Lock Switch Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry system For further information refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle If you press the power door lock switch while the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or closing the door will allow the locks to operate If a door is open and the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the K
198. e fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4 L of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution 474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or lo
199. e the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle equipped before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further information CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no transmission shifting occurring N WHAT TODOINEMERGENCIES 451 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 5 SPEED TRANSMISSION If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Turn the engine OFF 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Remove the rubber tray from the storage bin located to the right of the shift lever The override access port is near th
200. e ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held transmit ter button 4 Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHAN NEL TRAINED then release both buttons NOTE e It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased for the channel to train e If the EVIC displays DID NOT TRAIN repeat from Step 2 5 At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 6 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time The EVIC will display CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not
201. e RSA RR iia es 413 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCED ecu veu a eabeeeedyocen ees ve 74 75 LUPHCAUOn DOO serere RR gU d ber couse 472 Maintenance bree Battery lt q 402 ech vnc diiis 467 Maintenance Procedures leen 463 Maintenance Schedule 510 Maintenance General eee 463 Maintenance Sunroof leen 264 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 284 461 Manual Transmission 485 Fluid Level Check N INDEX 549 Manual Service 0 00 cee ee eee 533 Master Cylinder Brakes 0 482 Memory Feature Memory Seat 189 Memory Scal snaaks ener 189 Memory Seats and Radio i eed be SE ds agin 189 Methanol us ae xor EUR Go ee eae eens eae eee 422 Mi Die COMPU s aus abn Soe eae to 4 Dorn 302 MIOL 40 0 4 Gabe qo 9 2 e a de dE S d audqams 94 ZUOFOmallc DIMMING cevase 94929 dee wired 94 Electric Powered lesen 97 Electric Remote i e 84 264048688 PTS 97 Exterior Folding 2 44 6464844 44445489445 96 Heated 26 oi cbs eva ee Re s Ew TEER 98 Oude M ECC 95 Rearview SS SS ee SS 94 b on Avr 98 Mode Fuel Saver asi 2 44 4465534984 xx EE 300 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System i tous gu ES ES 413 Maar Lats er DR eos 462 532 MITDE LIBE os tenes ee eoe tog eee cee ea as 422 Multi Function Control Lever 199 Navigation System Uconnect gps
202. e Remote EE Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in k the passenger compartment Normal Starting Using The ENGINE START STOP Button NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To start the engine the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL Press and hold the brake pedal while press ing the ENGINE START STOP button once The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button ee STARTING AND OPERATING 359 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will display a Vehicle Not In Park message and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could
203. e SAB and SABIC air bags during WARNING Continued e If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to impacts that require air bag occupant protection WARNING your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should re Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag main free from any obstructions The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects enhanced protection and works together with the Driver between you and the side air bags the perfor Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact mance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Knee Impact Bolster The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the Continued front passenger and position the front occupant for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the Supplement
204. e Vehicle CAUTION e The metal end fitting from Power Plug 8 may get hot after use so it should be handled carefully Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 can result in sealant con tacting your skin clothing and the vehicle s inte rior It can also result in sealant contacting internal TIREFIT kit components which may cause perma nent damage to the kit D Drive Vehicle Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire drive the vehicle 5 miles 8 km or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire Do not exceed 55 mph 88 km h 444 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using TIREFIT Do not exceed 55 mph 88 km h until the tire is repaired or replaced Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you E After Driving Pull over to a safe location Refer to Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT before continuing 1 Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to the Air Mode position 2 Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet 3 Uncoil the Air Pump Hose 7 black in color and screw the fitting at the end of hose 7 onto the valve stem 4 Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge 3
205. e acid solution and can e It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced
206. e and damage the able from your authorized dealer is recommended converter and weld Ta vehicle has a dic If Engine Fails To Start charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Start ing in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 Clearing A Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press and hold the brake pedal push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button once The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10 seconds and then disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker st
207. e bottom of the bin to the right of the shift lever gate 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 452 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 5 Using a screwdriver or similar tool press and hold the 6 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position override tab through the access port on the center con sole 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL ma 8 Reinstall the rubber tray into the storage bin 051210780 N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 453 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE mar ma Condition Wheels OFF the Ground SRT8 MODELS Flat Tow 000 Tow NONE IF Transmission is operable e Transmission in NEUTRAL Front e 30 mph 48 km h max speed Wheel Lift e 15 mi 24 km max distance Rear OK Flatbed BEST METHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for the purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position If the vehicle s battery is discharged see Shift Lever Override in What To Do In Emergencies for instruc tions on shifting t
208. e is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system Erase all channels before you begin programming To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display CLEAR ING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC displays CHANNELS CLEARED NOTE e Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons e If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Turn the ignition switch to th
209. e locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision 276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M REAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear windo
210. e pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 404 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or
211. e sealant flows through the Sealant Hose 6 the Pressure Gauge 3 can read as high as 70 psi 5 Bar The Pressure Gauge 3 will decrease quickly from ap proximately 70 psi 5 Bar to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty 2 The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi ately after the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver side latch pillar recommended pressure Check the tire pres sure by looking at the Pressure Gauge 3 N WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 443 If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes e The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn off the TIREFIT kit 2 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle 1 and place the sticker on the instrument panel 3 Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle storage location Quickly proceed to D Driv
212. e unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat Front Heated Seat Operation Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch 4 3 Press the CLIMATE hard key located next to the Uconnect Touch display to enter the climate control screen a Press the Driver or Pass seat soft key lo cated on the Uconnect Touch display once to select HI level heating Press the soft key a second time to select LO level heating Press the soft key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF Front Heated Seat Operations Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch 8 4 and 8 4 Nav Press the Controls soft key located on the Uconnect Touch display Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key once to select HI level heating Press the soft key a second time to select LO level heating Press the soft key a th
213. e vehicle s braking distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was depressed e This feature will only function when applying the brakes at speeds above 30 mph 48 km h e The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com plete stop G Force When selected this screen displays all four G Force values two lateral and two longitudinal as well as steering angle When a force greater than zero is measured the display will update the value as it climbs As the G Force falls the peak forces will continue to display Gauges 1 When selected this screen displays the following values e Oil Temperature Shows the actual oil temperature within the range of the gauge e Oil Pressure Shows the actual oil pressure e Battery Voltage Shows the actual battery voltage Gauges 2 When selected this screen displays the following values N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 e Coolant Temperature Shows the actual coolant temperature within the range of the gauge e Oil Temperature Shows the actual oil temperature within the range of the gauge e Transmission Temperature Shows the actual transmission temperature within the range of the gauge e Intake Air Temperature Shows the actual intake air temperature within the range of the gauge e Oil Pressure Shows the actual oil pressure e Battery Voltage Shows the actual battery voltage Engine Whe
214. e vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle e The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop e The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill However a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal In addition downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending down hill This is normal operation and necessary to main tain set speed 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Setting The Following Distance In ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between 3 long 2 me dium and 1 short Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead This distance setting displays in the EVIC ACC 55 mph DISTANCE 3 032433101 Distance Set To change the distance setting press the Distance button and release Each time the button is pressed the distance setting adjusts between long medium and short If there is no vehicle ahead the vehicle will maintain the set speed If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane the EVIC displays the Sensed Vehicle Indi cator icon and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto matically to maintain the distance setting regardless of the set speed The vehicle will then maintain the
215. e vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Continued 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Continued e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights
216. eavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac tivating BeltAlert NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with belt alert seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is an accident N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Seat Belt Extender WARNING If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so Using a seat belt extender when not needed can equipped is in its lowest position your authorized increase the risk of injury in an accident Only use dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This when the seat belt is not long enough when
217. ed If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Feature Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will tum off when the wipers are turned o
218. ed WARNING e Driving through standing water may cause dam e Driving through standing water limits your vehi age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you ee STARTING AND OPERATING 377 POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increas
219. ed children can be come entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may re sult in serious injury or death AUTO Down Feature The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an AUTO down feature Press the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go down automati cally To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during I the AUTO down operation pull up on the switch briefly AUTO Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually
220. ed ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be 378 STARTING AND OPERATING ee checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the sy
221. efore driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate NOTE e Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWKRs e Refer to the Tire Placard for your vehicle s proper tire pressure TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Recreational towing with all four wheels on the ground or using a tow dolly is NOT ALLOWED The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle behind an other vehicle is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Mi Hazard Warning Flashers lB if Your Engine Overheats B TIREFIT Kit O TIREFIT Storage O TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation O TIREFIT Usage Precautions O Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT 434 434 435 436 436 438 440 B jump Starting Procedures 446 O Preparations For Jump Start 446
222. ehicle damage ParkView should only using the Park View Rear Back Up Camera Always be used as a parking aid The Park View camera is check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in your check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob drive path structions or blind spots before backing up You are To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be responsible for the safety of your surroundings and driven slowly when using Park View to be able to must continue to pay attention while backing up stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 Turning ParkView On Or Off With Touch Screen Radio 1 Turn the Radio on 2 Press the More soft key 3 Press the Settings soft key 4 Press the Safety amp Driving Assistance soft key 5 Press the check box soft key next to Parkview Backup Camera to enable disable 033333450 OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights and storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door Opener HomeLink and power sunroof switches may
223. eld phone call 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Join Calls When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Join Calls soft key on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the So button or the end soft key Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automati cally This is cell phone dependent Redial e Press the Redial soft key e or press the amp and after the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF NOTE The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth connection It is recommended to press the transfer soft key when leaving the vehicle Uconnect Phone Features Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area N UNDERST
224. electing Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Pair Additional Mobile Phones e Touch the More soft key to begin e Touch the Settings soft key Booi poling es e Next touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Touch the Add Device soft key Make this phone the favorite e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen e Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen NOTE For phones which are not made a favorite the while the system is connecting phone priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest phone paired will have the higher e When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take pre cedence over other paired phones within range priority 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M You can also use the following VR commands to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio e Show Paired Phones or e Connect My Phone Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device e Touch the Player soft key to begin e Change the Source to Bl
225. em system It is not a substitute for active driving involvement It is always the driver s responsibil ity to be attentive of road traffic and weather conditions vehicle speed distance to the vehicle ahead and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions Your complete attention is always re quired while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury Continued Does not react to pedestrians oncoming ve hicles and stationary objects e g a stopped ve hicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle Cannot take street traffic and weather condi tions into account and may be limited upon ad verse sight distance conditions Does not predict the lane curvature or the move ment of preceding vehicles and will not compen sate for such changes Does not always fully recognize complex driv ing conditions which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings Can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 WARNING The Cruise Control system has two control modes You should switch off the ACC system e Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an Aa appropriate distance between vehicles e When driving in
226. em Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants A C Air Filter The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle next to the windshield wipers When installing a new filter ensure its proper orientation 1 Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips Access Door 2 Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471 LERAAR Ak ka AA AAN Filter Access Cover A C Air Filter 3 Remove the used filter 5 Close the filter access cover 4 Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper direction of airflow which is toward the rear of the maintenance intervals vehicle text and arrows on the filter will indicate this 472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attentio
227. emote Starting ou da qs 9S PEST es 25 TachOMeter 2uueirsstepEs DRS 9 44 0532 HAD 33434 281 Telescoping Steering Column 208 209 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 348 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 289 435 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 74 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 Theft System Security Alarm 17 Tilt Steering COMM 424 44 she Rr DR HA 208 209 Time Delay Headlight uc aaa qs oe ey d qe E ien 197 Tire and Loading Information Placard 997 Tire Identification Number TIN 995 Tie Markings pandas p E Xr EE AE RE d EE ob 392 dive Satety InfOrmauon 4 4 5 preke ode ee ed 392 UREP 4 ET EN ee ve eee ET OE EG 435 TES 120539949 12 90297332999 ee oes 86 401 535 Age Lite of Tires saw Eso per aes 408 pui Die OIE sein hese HR EE BSE eo 401 N INDEX 555 Clans 2444555424024 OE OE EE 410 Compact SPale 23293299 419 408 WERS 405 General Information 4224 ce dr died 24 54 401 Piet eed P ER ARE SE E 404 Inflation Pr SSUPGS sig ete iid saa es aod 402 Liter Tires oue Race 9 RR URS pees sees 408 Load Capa ode eue d aoe d ax 397 398 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 413 Pressure Warning Light sos sees dieceddacs 282 Qualy Grading issie se EE MAER SR 535 ei 4244 o8 hemo no ER EET 404 Replacement serre oek KERR ED SEED GR 409 Bolton 46 sce eae Ho ne Di HR nee 412 Daley uisa Me 44 AR Ee PER I RE S d 392 401 Jo M 393 seni T 407
228. en asked John Smith Please remember the Uconnect N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Phone works best when you talk in a normal conver sational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Natural Speech Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition VR engine Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly omith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Voice Command EVR button Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the amp button and say a comma
229. ence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Voice Command VR button Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the N button and say a command or say help All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the SX button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu You can also press the Se or VR buttons when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 NOTE Pressing the te Or EVR buttons while the system is playing is known as Barging In refer to Barge In Overriding Prompts for further information Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process
230. eo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 531 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents
231. er than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat be
232. erature turns off after 10 minutes CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window control Push the button for warmer temperature set tings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 7 Passenger Temperature Control Down Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 8 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON OFF 9 AUTO Operation Button If Equipped Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount Performing NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345 this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Refer to Automatic Operation for more information 10 Driver Temperature Control Down Button Provides the driver with independen
233. erform the following 1 Place the ignition into the RUN position 2 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences ie seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and radio station presets 3 Press and release the SET S button on the memory switch 4 Within five seconds press and release the MEMORY button 1 or 2 The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped will display which memory position has been set NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 NOTE e Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile e The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To program your RKE transmitters perform the follow ing 1 Remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go 2 Select desired memory profile 1 or 2 3 Once the profile has been recalled press and release the SET S button on the memory sw
234. es In addition the 12 volt power outlet USB and Aux jack are located here WARNING Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury 274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Door Storage Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped with 60 40 The door panels contain storage areas Split Folding Rear Seat The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters When the seats are folded down they provide a continuous nearly flat extension of the load floor When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into Front Door Trim Storage position If the seatback is not securely locked into 035235231 position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injuty Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275 WARNING Continued WARNING e The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in th
235. es nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning WARNING Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC system serviced as well 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has
236. es refer to Mainte nance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle CAUTION Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result NOTE A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee should be considered a normal part of the break in and WARNING Continued not interpreted as an indication of difficulty e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your SAFETY TIPS vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat Transporting Passengers belts NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and AREA using a seat belt properly WARNING Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Continued N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any long
237. essure Monitor System TPMS 413 And Wheel If Equipped 404 a Premium System au EU Aenea es ae O General Information siese se bn HE DE a 421 E e i a ea e Mi Fuel Requirements 0 421 oe ae a IE ids EG Al ENSIS ue acee eua RA E os PERD d 421 ao as uc desta ee me B Reformulated Gasoline 422 O Tread Wear Indicators 408 7 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 422 EIC OP DS uou wa ae eN qot ded ee Er 408 O E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 423 356 STARTING AND OPERATING M O MMT In Gasoline 0000 423 O Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 430 Fi Materials Added To Fuel 14 225 29 93 424 H Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 430 O Fuel System Cautions 4 side ep a N RR 424 DP OVEHOAGING P 430 O Carbon Monoxide Warnings 425 ALOON ie oe NAE ea ge PERS H3 431 M Adding Fuel 2 044235 DEAR DEE DO ED 426 W Ire Towing c2 2126 Re RE TRIER 431 H Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release 428 W Recreational Towing Ma chicle Loading sis Ser eroe n 429 Pe n O oer DERE SEP qa e O Vehicle Certification Label 429 NS 1AH TING AND OPERATING 357 WARNING Continued e Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present inst
238. esulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately 476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam Cooling System age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition WARNING when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis motion connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires You or others can be badly burned by hot engine disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator
239. et to Off Lights or Lights and Chime The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Moni tor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is activated the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deacti vated To change the Blind Spot Alert status touch the OFF Lights or Lights amp Chime soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification e Rain Sensing Touch the Rain Sensing soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection touch the Rain Sensing soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Hill Start Assist If Equipped Touch the Hill Start Assist soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the Hill
240. ethod is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can utilize the touch screen or press the vR button and say the word Send then the sequence you wish to enter For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the VR button and say Send 3 7 4 6 ff Saying Send followed by a number or sequence of numbers is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries For example if you previously created a Phone book entry and or Last Name as Voice Password then if you press the EvR button and say Send Voicemail Password the Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phone book entry as tones over the phone N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES
241. etting Change e Driver Override e ACC Proximity Warning e ACC Unavailable Warning The EVIC will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee The Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas i e tunnels with reflective tiles or ice and snow The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas Under rare conditions when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur Clean Radar Sensor in Front of Vehicle 032433103 Clean Radar Sensor Warning NOTE If the ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning is active Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section If weather conditions are not a factor the driver should examine the sensor It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille To keep the ACC System operating properly it is impor tant to note the following maintenance items e Always keep the sensor clean Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens e Do not remove any screws from the sensor Doing so could cause an ACC system m
242. eu sd 107 Fi SOLO MD 110 O Phone Call Features 116 O Uconnect Phone Features 120 H Advanced Phone Connectivity 125 O Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone is ei one See nya 125 O General Information 129 Bl Uconnect Phone 8 4 8 4N 130 O Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 NAV 130 ELODGIQUOD 24450540480 hobs be eH KRONE 133 O Phone Call Features 04 143 O Uconnect Phone Features 148 O Advanced Phone Connectivity 153 O Things You Should Know About Your Uconmect PhOfle v 46 55 4458 3 uer BERE ais 153 O General Information 163 Mi Voice Command sss 164 O Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 NAV 164 DB Uconnect Voice Commands 166 O Voice d MATE AS TERE OE TE es 167 NM dis ERA ERA EET RERO EN HY 178 LLl Ower Deals sets is one x CEA Ee seeded 178 G Power Lambat lt iis ook 359 43 o s ach d 181 O Heated Seats 0 cee eee eee 181 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 OVentilated seats wos 4s 4 kSh ee ER es 184 0 Head Resale ua Sere o qe oe PIE RO 185 ELPOIGING Rear Seal 520 40 8 eon MR tases 188 W Driver Memory Seat If Equipped 189 O Programming The Memory Feature 190 O Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory 191 o Memory Position Recall vs ER 192 O Easy En
243. ey Fob Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is disabled When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer per written request of the customer Please see your authorized dealer for service Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch i Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for __ further information NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system 021835328 To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System Child Pro
244. f approximately 60 possible warn ing or information messages These pop up messages fall into several categories e Five Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Most of the messages of this type are then stored as long as the condition that activated it remains active and can be reviewed from the Messages main menu item As long as there is a stored message an i will be displayed in the EVIC s compass outside temp line Examples of this message type are Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out and Low Tire Pressure 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Unstored Messages This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared Examples of this message type are Turn Signal On if a turn signal is left on and Lights On if driver leaves the vehicle e Unstored Messages Until RUN These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state Examples of this message type are Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar and Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start e Five Second Unstored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Ex amples of this
245. ff if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Setting 4 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE e The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high speed position e The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind shield e Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee The Rain Sensing system has protection featu
246. for further information SmartBeam If Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle spe cific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 NOTE e The SmartBeam system can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area To activate the delay feature turn OFF the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature If you turn the headlights park lights or ignition switch ON again the syste
247. from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 Front Map Reading Lights Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either si side of the console These buttons are backlit for night The front map reading lights are mounted in the over Rn ead ones time visibility To turn the lights off press the switch a l second time The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE is pressed 031433150 Front Map Reading Lights 031433151 Front Map Reading Light Switches 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Ambient Light Interior Lights The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The interior lights come on when a door is opened feature This light casts illumination for improved visibil ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open This includes the glove box light but not the trunk light To re
248. ft lever to activate ERS Refer to Automatic Transmission in Starting And Operating for further information 7 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided 1 should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to
249. fter pushing the Uconnect voice command button q amp VR an the steering wheel Navigation PI ne Route ayer Home screen will shown on the touch screen Cancels listening to Guidance Prompt is repeated your voice command 030003040 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE 1 Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles 2 You can replace Player with Radio Navigation Phone Climate More or Settings 3 Navigation commands only work if equipped with Navigation 4 Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Uconnect Voice Command Navigation Universal Commands Thus cesrimemo can be spear an any scraum whan nol dams phone call entrar steering wheel alier pushing the Uncenert vos command bu DEVR Garmin Guided Dialog Ter iting festauiant tral are near to you current location Garmin prompt wil he Where Am Garmin will choose played asking if sareei will 6n Altamata route Init does not include uieplayed hoe rend Lum Imre Gurrerit aviation Rome Navination Route will not be i canceled will tra canceled 030563042 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE 2 You can say Find Nearest then Restaurant Fuel 1 You can also say Find City Find Favorite Find Transit L
250. g lights are turned on NOTE The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 HA TY 2 Pale slu OFF e L 4 mee SH gt WASH a aO n d al WIPER 2 LO 0316563008 Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE xe NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective A Turn Signal On message will appear in the EVIC if equipped and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi 1 6 km with either turn signal on Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away
251. gear The UPSHIFT message will appear when approaching the maximum engine speed WARNING e The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop e You can start out in first or second gear Tapping at a stop will allow starting in second gear Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a e The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their of a vehicle speed grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury e Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged To disengage AutoStick mode hold the shift lever to the right or press and hold the shift paddle until D is once again e If AutoStick is engaged while in Auto mode the displayed in the instrument cluster You can shift in or transmission will automatically shift up if maximum out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking engine speed is reached your foot off the accelerator pedal Auto 372 STARTING AND OPERATING ee e Heavily pressing the accelerator pedal may generate an automatic downshift for improved acceleration e This mode should be used for most driving situations Sport e If AutoStick is engaged while in Sport mode the transmission will remain in the selected gear even when maximum engine speed is reached
252. gine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing cool ant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481 When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing
253. gs depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain air bag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery
254. h Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Uconnect Voice Command VR button 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Voice Commands The Uconnect Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are avail able at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect Voice Com mand EVR button Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command Sve button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking Please note the volu
255. h the Set Time soft key adjust the hours and minutes using the up and down soft keys select AM or PM select 12 hr or 24 hr Then touch the arrow back soft key when all selections are complete e Show Time Status Touch the Show Time Status soft key to change this display When in this display you may turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar To change the Show Time Status setting press and release the ON or OFF soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Sync Time Touch the Sync Time soft key to change this display When in this display you may have the radio set the time automatically To change the Sync Time setting press and release the ON or OFF soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key Safety Assistance e Front Collision Warning If Equipped Touch the Front Collision Warning soft key to change this display The Front Collision Warning FCW feature can be can be set to Far set to Near or turned Off The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEE dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you This allows for a more dynamic driving experience To change the FCW status pres
256. h the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone simply touch the Mute button on the Phone main screen N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Voice Command e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from
257. h to program 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button while you press and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds 4 Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHAN NEL TRAINED then release both buttons NOTE e It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased for the channel to train e If the EVIC displays DID NOT TRAIN repeat from Step 2 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button The EVIC will display CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button Security To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn follow these steps in your vehicle 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To erase the channels press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display 3 CLEARING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC displays CHANNELS CLEARED 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the EVIC displays CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with
258. has power or until the ignition is cycled off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin ey
259. hat make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487 e Insects tree sap and tar e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing ve h iminish the gl hi h i e Salt in the air near seacoast localities pee diminish the gloss or thin out the paint e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing CAUTION e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild puch aene wee EE m powdery that wll i l scratch metal and painted surfaces car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with sees e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can re
260. have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the phone e button answer soft key or caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the vr button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress Or you can place a call on hold by touching the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen then dial a number from the dialpad recent calls SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Join Calls in this section Place Retrieve A Call From Hold During an active call touch the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Swap soft key on the Phone main screen Only one call can be placed on hold at a time You can also press the button to toggle between the active and h
261. he traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability 384 STARTING AND OPERATING M Brake Assist System BAS This system complements the ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency brake ma neuvers This system detects an emergency braking situ ation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefits of this system you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road co
262. he EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor it indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer ACG FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor 56789 mi 032433104 ACC FCW Unavailable Warning PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
263. he automatic transmission out of the PARK position for towing 454 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M CAUTION Flatbed towing is recommended If the transmission is operable vehicles this vehicle may be towed with rear wheels on the ground under the following conditions e Do not use sling type equipment when towing Damage to the fascia will occur When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to the front or rear suspension compo The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL nents Damage to your vehicle may result from The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h improper towing Do not push or tow this vehicle with another The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles 24 km vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 455 If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground on a flatbed or with the rear wheels raised using a wheel lift and the transmission in NEUTRAL CAUTION Failure to follow these towing methods can cause severe transmission damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the
264. he floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets e Mix Mode We Air comes from the floor defrost and side window vel demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions e Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side win dow defrosting and defogging When the defrost mode is selected the blower level may increase NOTE For Manual Climate Controls while operating in other airflow modes than Defrost the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass 13 SYNC Press the Sync soft key to toggle the Sync feature On Off The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature 14 Temperature Control Manual Temperature Control Only Press the temperature soft key to regulate the tempera ture of the air inside the passenger compartment Moving NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347 the temperature bar into the red area indicates warmer temperatures Moving the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures
265. he precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Continued 426 STARTING AND OPERATING ADDING FUEL 1 Press the fuel filler door release switch located in the driver s door map pocket 056810781 Fuel Filler Door 3 There is no fuel filler cap A flapper door inside the pipe seals the system Fuel Filler Door Release Switch 4 Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe the 2 Open the fuel filler door nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling NS 1AH TING AND OPERATING 427 NOTE Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches allowing the flapper door to open 5 Fill the vehicle with fuel when the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full 6 Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door NOTE A funnel is provided located in the trunk in the spare tire area to open the flapper door to allow for emergency refueling with a gas can Fuel Funnel CAUTION To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling 428 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING 2 Remove the access cover located on the left side inner trim panel e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Ligh
266. he previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from yo
267. he steering wheel outward or upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in shorten the steering column The power tilt telescoping position push the lever upward until fully engaged steering column lever is located below the multifunction 3 lever on the steering column WARNINCG Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death Power Tilt Telescoping Switch 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To tilt the steering column move the lever up or down as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the tilt telescopic steering column to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure
268. hen touch the SRT soft key Press the UP or DOWN soft key to cycle through the features Press the feature soft key to select that feature NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 WARNING 0 60 mph 0 100 km h Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor mance Features is intended for off highway or off road use only and should not be done on any public roadways It is recommended that these features be used in a controlled environment and within the Instantaneous G Force Peak G Force 4 Braking Distance 1 8 Mile e 1 4 Mile limits of the law The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the performance pages must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which Digital Speedometer can jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents Timers The following describes each feature and its operation 0 60 mph 0 100 kmlh 1 8 Mile 1 4 Mile When selected this screen displays the time it takes for e Timers the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph 0 to 100 km h 1 8 mile or 1 4 mile The Performance Page include the following e Engine Values e Digital Gauge Displays 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e The feature will be ready when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph 0 km h e Soft keys allow access to the current best and last times recorded Braking Distance When selected this screen displays th
269. hen you press the Uconnect Voice Command VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command If no command is spoken the system will say one of two responses e didn t understand e I didn t get that etc If a command is not spoken a second time the system will respond with an error and give some direction as what can be said based on the context you are in After three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR session with end Pressing the Uconnect Voice Command VR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can say a command This will become helpful once you start to learn the options N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel or Help These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear available commands press the Uconnect Voice Command EVR button and say Help You will hear available commands for the screen displayed Natural Speec
270. her as this 1 Connect the positive 4 end of the jumper cable to the could establish a ground connection and personal remote positive 4 post of the discharged vehicle injury could result 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper Jump Starting Procedure cable to the positive post of the booster battery WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion N WHAT TODOINEMERGENCIES 449 WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the dis charged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the po
271. hicle 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging On systems with Manual Climate Controls the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Mix Floor and Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be dis abled automatically if these modes are selected Attempt ing to use Recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Automatic Temperature Control ATC ATC Hard keys are located in the center of the instru ment panel Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch system screen Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO hard key or soft key button 9 on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature hard or soft control buttons 6 7 10 11 Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possibl
272. hifted out of REVERSE To make your selection touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Blind Spot Alert When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off Lights or Lights and Chime The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is activated the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deacti vated To change the Blind Spot Alert status touch the Off Lights or Lights amp Chime soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification e ParkView Backup Camera Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle
273. his option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip ment tire and wheel as a spare a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non matching tempo rary use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one non matching temporary use spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T 5 Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attem
274. id the collision FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller EBC wheel speed sensors i e to calculate a probable rear end collision When the system determines that a rear end collision is probable a warning message both audible and visual will be displayed on the EVIC When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable the warning message will be deactivated UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 WARNING Forward Collision Warning FCW is not intended to avoid a collision on its own The driver has the NW Ba F BRAKE responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death Changing FCW Status The FCW feature can be set to far set to near or turned off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument FCW Message Panel for further information The FCW Status Off Near NOTE The minimum speed for FCW activation is or Far will be displayed in the Uconnect Touch display 10 mph 16 km h 032433107 The default status of FCW is the Far setting this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FE
275. ide convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Outside mirrors are hinged allowing the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Driver s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped The driver s outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts Outside Mirrors Approach Light If Equipped Driver and passenger outside mirrors equipped with approach lighting contain one LED which is located in the upper outboard mirror glass corner The approach light supplies illuminated entry lighting which turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open any door This LED shines outward to illuminate the front and
276. ide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength and phone battery strength Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone simply touch the Mute button on the Phone main screen N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect
277. ift lever Continued do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury ee STARTING AND OPERATING 381 CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up The Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD prevents the rear wheels from over braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly This self check o
278. ights On With Wipers eh Beam Sess vu woe eaeod ER EE ee sees High Beam Indicator iere High Beam Low Beam Select Uuginated Enty x uacua x anges cR ed instument CIHSIBE esa za sx ene Intensity Control is sak ER RD So ELE PT dI P SA boo Seu ERROR KEES RES Lights On Reminder sie ska Xt ER EE LOW TU 2152532099299 SE ER DI n Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 548 INDEX NEE id ME eN li seregen PSI RER SC ERA TIEK 201 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 204 Da iS wie aanse Beha ee ee eee Oe 200 Keane c eo ee oe kes 201 252 Seat Belt Remind r iis ws DERE as RY 289 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 286 ENIGE oo RR TCR T E Sree bee eee 500 501 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 284 Marie wee c scies ie S OE MEd N ad 196 Theft Alarm Security Alarm usw 20 0s 286 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 282 413 TRACHOMALONUO issie ems vo nema anos 390 TUM IERE us 4 323 eked cee END a E E 86 199 Vamp MIGE Sadie a baie ie iis ie ME RE 2 98 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 281 Leading Velde 2253 02 ue DERE ER Deas os 429 431 e Oi 4544420 nies oot eae ee as 431 ii a ee ee AE ee 297 Locke 24354454540 oe oe be eee eee eee see 28 Auto Unlock RAPER bee beet eee EBORE 30 Automatic Door zzz Bx uepEG XS 30 Child Protection 2 2 esc ERR 31 DOOL Lcx more us 2 bee MR Nu A hehe x EU 28 Power Door sua xeu AR EREDIENS oS Es 29 Low Tire Pressure System aci voe
279. ill improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465 Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 10725 and are approved to MB 229 3 or MB 229 5 will be listed on the back label of the oil container The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic 5W 40 or equivalent engine oil CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 40 engine oil is preferred for use in all operating temperatures The engine oil filler cap
280. ill take precedence over other paired devices within range NOTE If No is selected device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest device paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR command to bring up a list of paired audio devices e Show Paired Audio Devices Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority paired phone and or Audio Device 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M within range If you would need to choose a particular Phone or Audio Device follow these steps Touch the Settings hard key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Touch to select the particular Phone or the Phone Audio soft key and then an Audio Device At the Options pop up screen touch the Connect Device soft key Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device Touch the Settings hard key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Select the Phone or Audio Device At the Options pop up screen touch the Disconnect Device soft key Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device Touch the Settings hard key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Select the Phone or Audio Device At the Options pop up screen touch the Delete De vice soft key Tou
281. in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death Headlight Switch 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight parking light and instrument panel light operation Automatic Headlights This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF To turn the automatic system off move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the automatic mode Headlights On With Wipers When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel
282. in the armrest and side by side to provide con venient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintain ing a resting place for the rear occupant s elbows 035139997 Rear Seat Cupholders UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271 Lighted Cupholders If Equipped On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear passengers The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer Control Refer to Lights in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle for further information P Light Ring In Rear Cupholder 272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE STORAGE Glovebox Storage The glovebox storage compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel Opened Glovebox Storage Compartment Console Features There is an open cubby bin located forward of the shift lever Glovebox Storage Compartment Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the center console armrest Center Console 035335227 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273 Inside the center console armrest there is a removable upper storage tray that can be slid forward rearward on rails for access to the lower storage area This tray has an integrated coin holder along with additional area for small items like an ipod or phone Below the upper tray the lower storage compartment is made for larger items like CDs and tissue box
283. ine before turning ON the TIRE FIT kit NOTE Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL e After pressing the Power Button 4 the sealant white fluid will flow from the Sealant Bottle 1 through the Sealant Hose 6 and into the tire NOTE Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire If the sealant white fluid does not flow within 0 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn Off the TIREFIT kit Disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem Make sure the valve stem is free of debris Reconnect the 442 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Sealant Hose 6 to the valve stem Check that the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode Press the Power Button 4 to turn On the TIREFIT kit 2 Connect the Power Plug 8 to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle if avail able Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the TIREFIT kit 3 The Sealant Bottle 1 may be empty due to previous use Call for assistance NOTE If the Mode Select Knob 5 is on Air Mode and the pump is operating air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose 7 only not the Sealant Hose 6 If the sealant white fluid does flow through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose typically takes 30 70 sec onds As th
284. ing overheat condition e f your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 435 CAUTION TIREFIT KIT Small punctures up to 4 6 mm in the tire tread can be Driving with a hot cooling system could damage sealed with TIREFIT Foreign objects e g screws or your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H nails should not be removed from the tire TIREFIT can pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with be used in outside temperatures down to approximately the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops 4 F 20 C back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service This kit will provide a temporary tire seal allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles 160 km with a maximum speed of 55 mph 88 km hr WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling
285. ing the vehicle always ON the key An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle remove the Key Fob from vehicle cycle the ignition OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or T others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil SER RET dren should be warned not to touch the parking The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls Or The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry move the vehicle RKE transmitter a Keyless Ignition Node KIN and a Do not leave children or animals inside parked RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the cause serious injury or death vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR
286. ings and replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 518 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service 66 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter LJ Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate tires filter L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner J Rotate tires filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end
287. intenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 104 000 miles 169 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479 e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightene
288. ird time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the Hl level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HI level If the HlI level setting is selected the N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 system will automatically switch to LO level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HI to LO indicating the change The LO level setting will turn OFF automati cally after a maximum of 45 minutes Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Rear Heated Seats On some models the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats The heated seat switches for these seats are located on the rear of the center console There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently You can choose from HI LO or OFF heat settings Amber indica tor lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI one for LO and none for OFF a NOTE e Once
289. itch then press and release the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 will display in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC 4 Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by pressing the SET S button followed by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 above Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will display in the EVIC if equipped To recall the memory settings for driver 1 press MEMORY button number 1 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver 2 press MEMORY button number 2 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons S 1 or 2 on the driver s door during a recall When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped stop mov ing A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory Seat Only This feature p
290. ith a damp cloth or MOPAR Satin Select or equivalent Do not use e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery 490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping w
291. ith a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491 quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag or micro fiber towel A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap
292. ith the anchorage symbol on the rear seat but are not visible You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it ln addition there are tether strap anchorages sy behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seatcover material Then rotate the tether anchor age cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the
293. ith the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts There are two general meth ods for how Voice Command works 1 Say compound commands like Call John Smith mo bile 2 Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Listen prompt or an other prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Call and then John Smith and then mobile the following com pound command can be said Call John Smith mo bile e For each feature explanation in this section only the compound command form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound com mand form voice command Search for John Smith or you can break the compound command form into two voice commands Search Contact and wh
294. ity Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected the exterior lights will flash the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position from the OFF position NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON position extreme top position e The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position extreme bottom position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the Panic Alarm from dis tances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at
295. iven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure 414 STARTING AND OPERATING ee The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Telltale Light illu minates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire p
296. k Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483 Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re WARNING Continued fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that WARNING has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
297. k arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster When this feature is selected the turn by turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route To make your selection touch the Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Fuel Saver Display In Cluster The ECO message is located in the instrument cluster display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection touch the Fuel Saver Display soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 Clock After pressing the Clock soft key the following settings will be available e Sync Time With GPS When in this display you may automatically have the radio set the time To change the Sync Time setting touch the Sync with GPS Time soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Set Time Hours When in this display you may adjust the hours The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the hours up or do
298. ked Proceed Opposing Traffic slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected alert the driver RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to 2 mph 1 km h to 3 km h to objects moving a maxi mum of approximately 10 mph 16 km h such as in parking lot situations UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 NOTE Ina parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles the system will not be able to alert the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including reducing the radio volume WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using RCP Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before back ing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR
299. l Approximate 12 xm Engine Oil with Filter 6 4 Liter Engine SAE 5W 40 Synthetic API Certified Cooling System 6 4 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile 15 2 Quarts 14 4 Liters Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operat ing conditions the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 10725 and are approved to MB 229 3 or MB 229 5 The manufacturer recom mends the use of a full synthetic 5W 40 or equivalent engine oil Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs LZTR6AP11EG Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or higher es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part pila Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed epa HM product Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids Power Steering Re
300. l change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 511 e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level Refer to Maintenance Procedures Engine Oil in Maintaining Your Ve hicle for further information e Check the windshiel
301. l is seh Metn try dialed numbers stored In dialed redialed dialed ie SHOWN Smith with al for 1234 F Voiceniall stored are sent Password are numbers sarit 030863306 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 NOTE e You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone e You can replace John Smith with any name in your number supported by your Mobile phone mobile or favorite phone book You can also say Send a message to John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to send a message to for John Smith e f your phone does not support phonebook download e You can replace Mobile with Home Work or or call log download over Bluetooth than these com Other d mands will return a response that the contact does not l exist in the phonebook e You can replace 4 with any message number shown on the screen dio E tepl iva Incoming Calls with Outgoing e Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and Calls or Missed Calls underlined in the gray shaded boxes e Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect system is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone supports messaging over Bluetooth 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Text Messaging Reading Text Messages e Gomaeangs car De soccer mar tne teo messe mio s shoe Uconnect Text Messaging Teno eem die nen be tee rone ayy imme men pele en He d bie read Dine me
302. l mode Refer to AutoStick in Starting And Operating for further information In Auto mode the transmission has a sportier more aggres sive shift pattern In Manual mode the transmission will hold gear at redline during manual shifting shifter or paddle switches DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels 374 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly i
303. ld face and shaded grey NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Screen will change to Travel Link Home Uconnect Voice Command Travel Link commands The commands can be said on any screen when a call is nol active nfter pushing the Uconnect voice command bulton We VR on the steering wheel Screen will change to Travel Link Mavie Listings screen will Screen will change to change la Travel Link Travel Link Sports Favorites Screen will Screen will change to change to Travel Link Travel Link Fuel Prices Weather Screen will change to NFL Headlines 030563045 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE 3 You can also say Show Current Weather or Show 1 You can replace NFL with any league shown on the extended weather or Show five day forecast or Show sports league screen For example you can say Show ski info to get other forecasts MLB headlines or Show PGA headlines 4 Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face 2 You can replace Headlines with any menu items and shaded grey shown on a league screen For example you can say Show NFL Schedule and results or Show NCAA Basketball AP top 25 or Show Major League Baseball Teams NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 Uconnect Voice Command Non phone Universal amp Mode Commands The commands can be spoken on any screen when not on a phone call a
304. le 1 will pop up Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly 4 Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous ing 5 Position the new Sealant Bottle 1 in the housing so that the Sealant Hose 6 aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing Press the bottle into the housing An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place 6 Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 and return the hose to its storage area located on the bottom of the air pump 7 Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the vehicle 446 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury Preparations For Jump Start The batter
305. le a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON In addition the 420 STARTING AND OPERATING ee EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires Vehicles With Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a mini mum of five seconds
306. lfunction Indicator Light will illuminate To turn the ESC ON again mo mentarily press the ESC Off switch and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will turn off NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn the ESC ON again by momen tarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion NS 1AH TING AND OPERATING 387 WARNING When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the limited wheel slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled All other stabil ity features of ESC function normally When in Partial Off mode the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced Full Off This mode is intended for off highway or off road use only and should not be used on any public roadways In this mode all TCS and ESC stability features are turned OFF To enter the Full Off mode press and hold the ESC Off switch for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running After five seconds a chime will sound the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light will illuminate and the ESC OFF mes sage will display in the vehicle odometer
307. ll function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out side the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle To Enter The Trunk With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the deck lid press the button on the right side of CHMSL Center High Mounted Stop Light which is located on the deck lid NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 To Lock The Vehicle s Doors With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door handles press the door handle LOCK button to lock both doors 021840110 CHMSL Button NOTE If you inadvertently leave your vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the deck lid the deck lid will automatically unlatch unless another one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmit ters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft 1 5 m of the Ou
308. ll move in the direction of the switch Release los chest In a collision you could slide under the seat the switch when the desired position is reached E belt which could result in serious injury or death WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous CAUTION Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of Do not place any article under a power seat or control which could cause a collision and serious impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to injury or death the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious path injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Continued N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 Power Lumbar Vehicles eguipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also be eguipped with power lumbar The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support Power Lumbar Switch Heated Seats On some models the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated using the Uconnect Touch System WARNING e Persons who ar
309. looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter O C C C O L L L L L M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 523 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 Inspect the rear axle fluid Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 524 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See 138 000
310. lt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your autho rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners Continued WARNING Continued e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in th
311. ly be reestablished by switching the phone OFF ON Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Memm Voice Tree Uconnect Hands Free Calling Uconnect Hands Free Calling The commands can be spoken from any screen gfier pushing tha connect Phones ation te on be Available commands while phone call is in progress steerina wheel g The canere csi bic spoken ah HY gaton while s GM e ve iie tushla Vie Leona vors conimend bulion to pn the steering whsel Shows Ihe Number Last Last associated number incoming wall list will geh a JO SEM Number ia Dial Tones for wth entry i5 called is call is seh Metn try dialed numbers stored In dialed redialed dialed ie SHOWN Smith with al for 1234 F Voiceniall stored are sent Password are numbers sarit 030863306 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 NOTE You can replace John Smith with any name in your mobile or favorite phone book You can also say Send a message to John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to send a message to If your phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over Bluetooth than these com mands will return a response that the contact
312. m The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver door handle grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked 021837301 Grabbing The Driver s Door Handle NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver s door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati cally The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which wi
313. m will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The Headlight Time Delay is programmable using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped The Daytime Running Lights will turn On the first time the vehicle is shifted out of PARK and remain On unless the Parking Brake is applied Upon returning to the PARK position the DRLs will turn Off DRLs will turn Off when the ignition is switched OFF NOTE The Daytime Running Lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch O To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the headlight switch To turn off the front fog lights either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fo
314. me setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Starting Voice Recognition VR Session in Radio Player Modes In this mode you can say the following commands NOTE The commands can be said on any screen when a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect Voice Command Sve button Disc To switch to the disc mode say Change source to Disc This command can be given in any mode or screen e Track to change the track NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Voice Tree Commands only available in AM FM mode Audio will change to 950 AM Uconnect Voice Command AM FM Satellite Radio avallable commands These commands can be spoken when the AM FM or Satellite radio is playing ME VR after pushing the Uconnect voice command butte Commands available in AM FM Satellile mode Audio will change to the AM or FM frequency or Satellite Channel stored in preset 5 Audio will change to the next Satellite Rock Station on the steering wheel Commands only available Audio will change to BO s on 8 in Satellite made salellite station Audio will change ta Salellite Charinel amp 030803043 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE 3 You can replace 8 with any other satellite station 1 You can replace 950 AM with any other AM or FM named received by the radio frequency such as 98 7 FM 4 You
315. men a 2624645 WESE ED 52 Child Restraint 70 71 73 79 I Dc PI T 53 tout ed 299 29x4199 99995255 9 5 43 44 OPO CHON ass ee Sob BRA Goes OR ets dod d 84 Operating Instr ctions si sesiariecissss cs 44 Pretensioners eee eee eens 91 Kear beat aureus hs ore eee need eae aes 43 Untwistine Procedure usns eye vanes 48 vo ET 178 Pasy LOUY sie dese ded 2 RAS 8 deb PAPA AE RE 192 Head Restraints uu dev annaua aaaea 155 Heated etait BA OO ea ower oa Se 181 Hei hi nd astiient sis seep ome eom PERE 178 MODON 42424576445 bu RR AGORA OOR 189 POWOP 229 452 ERU ood ee Bo S ae 178 Rear Folding ua 33 AE LR EER RAS 188 Seatback Release SS EE ES Se 188 TUS 24 ae hee Ge VR ok VERS ER RED 178 Security Alarm Theft Alarm sous one bi EED pes 17 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 477 506 Selection Or Oil xa ep nee RELEASE Sewers 465 N INDEX 553 Sentry Key Immobilizer 142249224 34x rw 15 Sentry Key Programming ua 46 dh P oes E RUN EI 17 Sentry Key Replacement sse Rack 00054 HEN 16 Service Assistance 0 00 529 Service d ONE a ss ened a oR aa eee ea ees 591 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator ss a wey xe bo dows 284 Service Manuals leen 539 SMM p coed eset se IE EE oe ee 362 Automatic Transmission 362 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 48 Shoulder Belts as arx d RR XO Eder P sx ERA S 43 vire DAD C
316. mical flushes should be used in any trans mission only the approved lubricant may be used Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485 Fluid Level Check CAUTION Continued Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted e The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating If you notice fluid loss or transmission malfunction have conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe CAUTION damage to the transmission may occur Your au thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu fluid level accurately facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque conver
317. mission Control System Maintenance 460 Bi 2854556445 ee ees bee eae eee OE 459 far Cleaner iced s saa pawns aoa oe HIE 466 Bl ck Heater 55 vas outa ew doe abs 361 Break In Recommendations 81 Checking Oil Level 4 auteirue 64445 464 Compartment 3 sn en ESE FEES Phe Ge KS 459 Coolant Antifreeze 477 506 toi A SR EE EE ESE HEESE 476 N INDEX 543 Exhaust Gas Caution 82 425 Foust EL op igo eee Gee eee BO ED 360 Hiooded DIAMINE sad FG p HAS 360 Fuel Requirements ss ip du RR es 421 Jump DELE ues i 6st eh es Bed 446 Oi na EE EE ET 464 505 506 Ol hange Interval sier 25 ore KEN 298 464 Al File Gap ia siele ee RED a es A65 Agli Fr T OIE EDS 466 Oil fillet Disposal i229 ai HARE ER oen A66 Oil Selection RY me anne LAE LO wx 465 505 OU REG seri rer RARR EE bea S E 465 Vele P a ot HAT ORE es 434 Sat saeed R3 hy SE DE RA HE dE 357 Temperature Gauge uie rie be DER DRR es 289 Engine Oil VISCOSIDE sa ses v eei HER praptaa aa 465 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 66 Entry System Illuminated 2er Ri 20 PUNO 24555 2625088 DE asennad 4 HEESE 422 Event Data Recorder een 69 Exhaust Gas Caution 000 82 425 Exhaust lend 44 55 agate od qup Peg ced 82 474 Exterior Folding NDIEROIS oue sa RR ees 96 Exterior ieke idrara e euros Rubia WER da 195 Elenor LENS insae iri kki yp REIS DRR es 86 Filler Location Fuel eee 285 Filters
318. n by UP Button pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering Press and release the UP button to scroll up wheel Z ward through the main menu and Vehicle Info and Trip Info sub menus Fuel Economy Ve hicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Messages Trip Info Vehicle Speed and Turn Menu OFF and sub menus DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the main menu and Ve hicle Info and Trip Info sub menus Fuel Economy Vehicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Mes sages Trip Info Vehicle Speed and Turn Menu OFF and sub menus 040909599 EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons SELECT Button Press and release the SELECT button for access gt to main menus sub menus or to select a per sonal setting in the setup menu Press and hold the SELECT button for two seconds to reset features BACK Button Press the BACK button to scroll back to a BACK previous menu or sub menu Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays The EVIC display consists of three sections 1 The top line where compass direction odometer line and outside temperature are displayed 2 The main display area where the menus and pop up messages are displayed UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 3 The reconfigurable telltales section The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu The main display area also displays pop up messages that consist o
319. n er d 421 506 SOC memelllo soes vated Tes 9x Eva 42 Saver Mode lt 444 44 ex SR RR Ha does 300 SPECON sooie 69 ERROR Ie Iac d 506 Tank CODAGID antec 3 9 5o ELE ER B EAS 505 Piel OPEDUZET sinus eee eee Rene HA RA ER Du 300 Fiel SAVER APT 300 o saceaniess PERE bao RR BOER IE RE EE 492 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 253 Gasoline Fuel iaewbeew iseReAueRSG R93 421 CONSCIVING 42446 6056 ERROS Rue dE 300 N INDEX 545 Gasoline Clean Air 0 0000 ee eee 422 Gasoline Reformulated 422 Gauges Coolant Temperature scaena 9m dn e 289 Pile ens eae a ee E ae eee a Gee 285 e eoa e Ee 285 TADO suis vaas REKE eee as DEE 281 itu PPP Lr 364 General Information 17 24 129 163 236 421 General Maintenance sies ed RS RR ERA Kes 463 lies le nn D PLC Ern 490 Gross Axle Weight Rating 0 430 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 430 eN TEE eee eee EET 430 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Dancin Walei 6 444 044 5e 2899 TE FEES 374 Hazard Warning Plasher aa 22e BESPREEK 434 Head Kosie MP CN MM E 185 Headlight Wastes as aas 4 HER PERSE RESI da 473 bled BIS periere ded 949 paro dq dd ea 502 ABONA reriket etera 809 28 je DR bes 196 bulb Replacement sssi dors AI Rs ae 501 Scc FP T 490 pt TT 127 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 200 Li his On Reminder x us d vua vare Eme d 198 On Will WIPES iugera Se ops tanid 207 Passe
320. n prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at Or 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 535 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The
321. n selected this screen displays miles per hour mph horsepower hp torque ft lb oil pressure psi and gear selector values Handling When selected this screen displays peak g force instan taneous g force steering and yaw angles Options When selected this screen allows you to choose a stan dard or customize display for your SRT home page iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M For further information refer to the Uconnect Touch User s Manual HARMAN KARDON Logic7 HIGH PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER SELECTABLE SURROUND DSS IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon audio system with GreenEdge technology that offers superior sound quality higher Sound Pressure Levels SPL and reduced energy consumption The new system utilizes proprietary amplifier and speaker technologies deliver ing substantial increases in component and system effi ciency levels The 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge high efficiency amplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking power supply and drives a 7 5 channel playback architecture The Harm
322. n should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473 NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check th
323. n the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required You may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing e Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi wee tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information This light indicates that the transmission fluid light turns on safely pull over and stop the e Transmission Temperature Warning Light
324. nd Messages Using Soft Keys You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message e Touch the Phone soft key e Touch the messaging soft key then New Message e Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person you wish to send the message to N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 68 FM917 10 10 NW 54 om Send Messages Using Voice Commands Messaging gt New Message e Press the amp button TL 1 Yes s e After the Listening prompt and the following beep New 2 No Message say Send message to John Smith mobile 3 Call me 4 Heed director e After the system prompts you for what message you EY Cl ba Ton VL EXC AU want to send say the message you wish to send or say List There are 18 preset messages While the list of defined messages are being read you can interrupt the system by pressing the VR button and saying the message you want to send e f multiple numbers are available for the contact select which number you would like to have the message sent e Press Send or Cancel 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M After the system confirms that you want to send your List of Preset Messages message to John Smith your message will be sent 68 dd FM 91 7 10 10 NW 542 ow Wo 72 Messaging gt New Message gt 4 TT 1 Yes New 2 No Message 3 Call me 4 Need directions 5 I ll be there in lt XX gt minutes 6 Okay
325. nd or say help All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the amp button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie You can also press the te Or EVR buttons when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu NOTE Pressing the te Or EVR buttons while the system is playing is known as Barging In refer to Barge In Overriding Prompts for further informa tion Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing NOTE e You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to complete this procedure e The vehicle must be in PARK 1 You can do either of the following a Press the Settings hard key Page down to the Phone Bluetooth soft key press it and you will see the Paired Phones screen If there are no paired phones you will see lt Empty gt as the first device name b Press the MORE hard key then press the Phone soft key and you will go to the Uconnect Phone main screen Press the Settings soft key
326. nditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESC corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 385 power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by
327. nflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 375 Flowing Rising Water CAUTION WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave Shallow Standing Water effects Although your vehicle is capable of driving through Continued shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so 376 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Continu
328. ng Fluid Check osos 377 aM Parking Brake s ose v se stak peeing ex 378 W Anti Lock Brake System 381 N Electronic Brake Control System 383 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 383 OB Traction Control System TCS 383 O Brake Assist System BAS 384 O Electronic Stability Control ESC 384 B Hill Start Assist HSA 388 H Ready Alert Braking gos da dye bss eho es 390 El Raitt Drake SUPPONE sei dee d dace ad ririri 390 O ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC Oit Indicator Light sie asse REG 390 ES eli EOC v v3 qup s oa beeen ose te 991 N Tire Safety Information 392 O Tire Markings acis a i dd og ER e Ri d oe 392 O Tire Identification Number TIN 395 O Tire Terminology And Definitions 396 O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 997 NS TA TING AND OPERATING 355 H Tires General Information 401 El Replacement ites s s 444 su by OR DER eee 409 DI THO Piress sp bea erpe ES we ee PI S 201 aa UC Gaaiis oues ora c9 n o P IRAE tt 410 O Tire Inflation Pressures 402 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 412 H Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 404 B Tire Rotation Standard Tires 412 ARadial Piy ites 4 454 dH REQUE RSS RE SURE 404 H Tire Rotation All Season Tires 413 O Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire W Tire Pr
329. ng local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Uconnect Phone Button The Uconnect Phone amp e Button is used to amp get into the phone mode and make calls show recent incoming outgoing calls view phone book etc When you press the button you will hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Uconnect Voice Command Button The Uconnect Voice Command VR Button t VR is only used for barge in and when you are already in a call and you want to send Tones or make another call 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated w
330. nnect Touch System 4 3 Press the blower soft key to enter the blower setting screen Once in the blower settings screen use the UP and DOWN arrows to adjust the blower speed setting or directly select the speed setting by pressing the blower bar area around the blower icon The blower speed increases as you press the UP arrow or move clockwise on the setting scale and decreases when press the DOWN arrow or move counter clockwise on the setting scale Soft key Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons 4 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this fea ture is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode if equipped The blower speed may increase when Defrost mode is selected If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting 5 Rear Defrost Button Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See An indicator will illuminate when the rear window 6 Passenger Temperature Control Up Button defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically Provides the passenger with independent temp
331. ns NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operat ing properly e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 e When you turn ParkSense off the EVIC will display fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF Furthermore once you so can result in the system misinterpreting a close turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on object as a sensor problem causing the SERVICE again even if you cycle the ignition key PARK ASSIST message to be displayed in the EVIC e When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the EVIC will CAUTION display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for as e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable long as the vehicle is in REVERSE to recognize every obstacle including small ob stacles Parking curbs might be temporarily de tected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected e Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could pro
332. nstalling the power distribution center cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Exterior Lighting 1 Exterior Lighting 2 Interior Lighting Washer Pump When replacing a blown fuse it is important to er use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating 12 0 1 8 Car tridge Fuse 20 Amp Cigar Lighters Instru Yellow ment Panel amp Power Outlet Console Rear MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497 Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse pe HEC ee Eas 2 Red Port ee Blue EE 10 Amp Tire Pressure Monitor El sd 3 26 Fuse Spare SEE Natural gt gt 20 Amp Active Dampening 25 Amp Power Seats Yellow Module Natural 15 Amp HVAC Module Cluster Blue Fuse Spare Fuse Spare 498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 15 Amp Ignition Switch Wireless 25 Amp Rear Heated Seats Blue Module Natural Steering Wheel 10 Amp S
333. nt size may result in false speedometer and odometer read sion components You could lose control and have ings a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle TIRE CHAINS Never use a tire with a smaller load index or If driving conditions require tire chains for your vehicle capacity other than what was originally equipped use only chains that meet SAE type Class S specifica on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load tions In addition only install tire chains on 245 45ZR20 index could result in tire overloading and failure Size tires Contact you local authorized dealership or tire You could lose control and have a collision dealer for these size tires Continued NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 411 CAUTION CAUTION Continued To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the e Use on rear wheels only following precautions e Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave e Because of restricted chain clearance between tires ment and other suspension components it is important Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions that only chains in good condition are used Bro ken chains can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use on the method of installation operating speed and conditions
334. nued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle 422 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as reformulated gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTIO
335. o replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on accident This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in accidents Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an accident These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in an accident Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positione
336. o the phone mode and make calls show recent incoming outgoing calls view phonebook etc When you press the button you will hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Uconnect Voice Command Button x The Uconnect Voice Command Sve Button ti VR is only used for barge in and when you are already in a call and you want to send Tones or make another call The EVR button is also used to access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command features if your vehicle is equipped Please see the Uconnect Voice Command section for direction on how to use the Sve button The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts There are two general meth ods for how Voice Command works 1 Say compound commands like Call John Smith mo bile 2 Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must
337. odging Shopping Bank Entertain Play by Category Find Play by Name Find Recently ment Recreation Attractions Community Found Where to or Go Home Auto Services Hospitals Parking Airport Po lice Stations Fire Stations or Auto Dealers N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 Uconnect Hands Free Calling Universal amp Connect Commands The commands can be spoken from any screen after pushing the Uconnect Phone button te on he steering wheel Cancels listening ta your voice Settings screen Bluetooth paired will be shown audio devices will Connection be shawn process will be completed with touch screen tommand Bluetooth Phone List of connected List of paired phones will be shown 030803044 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Memm NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold Power Seats face and shaded grey On models equipped with power seats the switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor SEATS Use this switch to move the driver s seat up or down vehicle NOTE The passenger s seat will move up or down WARNING forward or rearward e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not e
338. oduced over a period of years child restraint systems NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should never install LATCH compatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage If installing child seats in adjacent rear seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH compatible install the restraints using the vehi cle s seat belts LATCH Anchorages Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufacturer s directions carefully when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Again carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system e ls meets the seatback and are located just below the button w
339. of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service WARNING A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlight switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electro cution if not serviced properly See your authorized dealer for service NOTE On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps when the headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lights This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges Backup Lamps 1 Open trunk 2 Remove fastener from cover TY wm 073339739 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503 3 Remove cover 4 Twist the bulb one quarter turn to remove Reinstall new bulb 6 Install cover and fastener 504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ea License Lamp 1 Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear fascia 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 1 License Lamp Bulb 2 Socket 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 5 Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia and then install the screws N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505 FLUID CAPACITIES Metric O Fue
340. of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions WARNING When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be intr
341. ogrammed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection touch the Channel Skip soft key select the channels you would like to skip Then touch the arrow back soft key e Subscription Info New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re subscribe Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEE Customer Programmable Features Uconnect BEAT Gal Ole GEE RS Touch System 8 4 Settings Press the More soft key then press the Settings soft key to display the menu setting screen In this mode the Uconnect Touch system allows you to access program mable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks EER EE Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start Engine Off Operation TE AE at Compass Settings Audio Phone Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup out Settings Display Clock S
342. onger exists the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash and the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates that the pres sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is displayed Vehicles With Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cyc
343. oo Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the front seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap A Jf 022641 ABT Pulling Out The Lap Shoulder Belt Latch Plate 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous abi
344. or Adjustable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals Adjustable Pedal Switch or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage 032036861 to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward toward the front of the vehicle Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward toward the driver e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving You could lose control and have an accident Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked NO ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED CANCE When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel 1 ON OFF 2 RES 4 CANCEL 3 SET NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control O
345. or Cruise is highlighted in the EVIC Status ofthe ACC When ACC is set the set speed will display or Cruise is also displayed in the menu line The set speed will continue to display in place of the odometer reading when changing the EVIC display while ACC is set Press and release the SELECT right arrow button to display the following information Adaptive Cruise Control Off NE 83 F When ACC is deactivated the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Off Adaptive Cruise Control Ready WMUZ The Light When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting The Atters has not been selected the display will read Adaptive He Lives Cruise Control Ready ACC 55 nph li E 032433431 Example Only N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC Display Warnings And Maintenance activity occurs which may include any of the following Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle Warning e Set Speed Change The ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning will display when conditions temporarily limit system performance This most often occurs at times of e System Cancel poor visibility such as in snow or heavy rain The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions such as mud dirt or ice In these cases the e System Off EVIC will display Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle and the system will deactivate e Distance S
346. or Spanish Espa ol soft key to select the language preferred Then touch the arrow back soft key As you continue the information will display in the selected language e Units Touch the Units soft key to change this display When in this display you may switch the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped between US and Metric units of measure Touch US or Metric then touch the arrow back soft key As you continue the information will display in the selected units of measure e Voice Response Touch the Voice Response soft key to change the Voice Response Length settings To change the Voice Response Length press and release the Brief or Long soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Touch Screen Beep Touch the Touch Screen Beep soft key to turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touch screen button soft key is pressed To change the Touch Screen Beep setting press and release the ON or OFF soft key then touch the arrow back soft key NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 e Fuel Saver Display Touch the Fuel Saver Display soft key to turn the ECO message located in the instrument cluster display on or off To make your selection touch the Fuel Saver Display soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Clock e Set Time Touch the Set Time soft key to change this display When in this display you may select the time display settings To make your selection touc
347. original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button for unauthorized operation While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed interior switches for door locks and decklid release are disabled If something 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will pro vide the following audible and visible signals the horn will pul
348. os see POU sos ea OD N eae RE 200 OWUC 224245754 8 URE Se PAR DAE 195 tune Delay se os Boe e N a SET Re HE oO 197 Washlels 424445444 REEDE RA BE obs 473 Heated Wnts lt emt egaka eani due n RE H i 98 Heated Seal PPP 181 Heater Engine Block 15 249 34s ode GR Ed 361 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 200 Hill Start Assist 546 INDEX M Holder COE 2 94 bee 4554636404 bee boss 272 Holden CUD 3 209 9093 3 909 99 ER N UR Geet d 268 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 253 Hood Release 422 ems 194 Ignition ICY ie aas eG been oe OE AA ee age eee 12 Dlutgnated EO sins sie ROOS Re RED RARR DE 20 Immobilizer Sentry Key sus ws yyw pS EER RES 15 Infant Restraint SS SS SS ce eee 70 71 Information Center Vehicle anaana 291 Inside Rearview Mirror SS ss ss ss ss se 94 Instrument Cluster SES 280 281 Instrument Panel and Controls 279 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 491 Integrated Power Module Fuses 492 Interior Appearance Care usc OER IE eva ees 489 Interior Fuses soet Rd ERE RESUME S EE E Yo 492 onor Lelie sooo EER ER ORE bd EED ED 202 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 205 did dELGK 4 bie cee ei DERS Hon RR MERE REE RE JUMP rud ior P MM DM 446 Keyla R minder ss aas arae riea rehe Foot 14 kes Programming oe aos oe ones ee PEAREN 17 Key ReplacOmenl 22224254 eR REOR 255 16 Key sentry MMOD ode es Vsces Vom staa 15 Keyless Enter N
349. ose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required WARNING e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475 CAUTION e The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat r
350. ou of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you This allows for a more dynamic driving experience To change the FCW status touch and release the OFF Near or Far button Then touch the arrow back soft key For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Park Assist The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF To change the Park Assist status touch and release the OFF Sound Only or Sounds and Display button Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to ParkSense Rear Park Assist in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for sys tem function and operating information N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 e Tilt Mirrors In Reverse When this feature is selected the outside sideview mir rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the RE VERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is s
351. p mp T Tu cx L1e0172 5HARGEF OWNER S MANUAL SRTS VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obliga tion upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured Copyright 2011 Chrysler Group LLC dy m
352. pected by an authorized dealer 14 Sport Mode This light will illuminate when the sport mode sport is selected This mode provides performance based tuning with improved handling and acceleration through an electronic controlled dampening system This system reduces body roll and pitch in many driving situations including cornering acceleration and braking 15 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi eo mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 16 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped a This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con e trol ESC is off OFF NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 17 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case
353. play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 519 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 520 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 90 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change
354. pot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar based sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to detect highway licensable vehicles automobiles trucks motorcycles etc that enter the blind spot zones from the rear front side of the vehicle l l l l i l l l l I l l Rear Detection Zones When the vehicle is started the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational The 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK 030440174 BSM Warning Light The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle 11 ft or 3 35 m The zone starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap proximately 20 ft 6 m to the rear of the vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE e The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones e The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If
355. prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capa bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 386 STARTING AND OPERATING ie ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has three available operating modes ESC On This is the normal operating mode for the ESC When ever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving situations The ESC should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs Partial Off The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired It is also intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the threshold for ESC activation which allows for more wheel spin than what ESC normally allows The ESC Off switch is located in the switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily press the ESC Off switch and the ESC Activation Ma
356. pt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time 406 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original e
357. quipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity ee STARTING AND OPERATING 407 WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 408 STAR
358. quipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down 3 The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached 030934977 Tilting The Seat Up Or Down Power Seat Switches The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four 1 Seat Control directions Pull upward or push downward on the front 2 Seatback Control or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Reclining The Seatback WARNING Continued The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward Push the seatback switch forward or rearward Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your the seat wi
359. r Touch the next to the selected number to display the options pop up In the pop up select Add to Favorites 68 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out e Wp 72 Bl Phonebook gt Mobile gt Ad Ana Conda Add to Favorites W 248 123 4567 248 456 7891 Wm 248 577 6215 NOTE If the Favorites list is full you will be asked to remove an existing favorite 3 From the Phone main screen select phonebook From the phonebook screen select the Favorites soft key and then select the soft key located to the right of the phonebook record Select an empty entry and touch the on that selected entry When the Options pop up appears 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie touch Add from Mobile You will then be asked which contact and number to choose from your mobile phone book When complete the new favorite will be shown 68 qs FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 ow Phonebook gt Fa We 2 Iptions ur mn a 4 Mobile Ej Voicemail Add from Mobile ir Favorites Empty mm Mom s Cell Emergency To Remove A Favorite e To remove a Favorite select phonebook from the Phone main screen e Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and then touch the Options soft key e Touch the next to the Favorite you would like to remove 68 4 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Wo 72 Phonebook rA s Mobile E Voicemail Remove from Favs Ld Favorites ve Buddy s Pizza F Mom s
360. r tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light 416 STARTING AND OPERATING ee e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Premium System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors e Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and e TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires A spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings A The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire
361. rear door handles It also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of the doors Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the driver s view of the ground rearward of the front doors The outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE The outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mir rors in Reverse position NOTE e The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned on when delivered from the factory The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 e Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver s door trim panel 030434975 Power Mirror Control The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but tons and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a mirror press either the L left or R right to select the mirror that you want to adjust NOTE A light in the select button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four a
362. ree dialing via Voice Call John Smiths Mo bile or Dial 248 555 1212 e Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming SMS messages e Hands Free text messaging Send a message to John Smiths Mobile e Redialing last dialed numbers Redial e Calling Back the last incoming call number Call Back e View Call logs on screen Show incoming calls Show Outgoing calls Show missed Calls Show Recent Calls e Searching Contacts phone number Search for John Smith Mobile Screen Activated Features e Dialing via Keypad using touch screen e Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis played on the touch screen e Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen e Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs e Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 e Sending a text message via the touch screen e Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the touch screen e Pairing up to 10 phones audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly NOTE Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via Bluetooth for messaging features to work properly Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone For Uconnect customer support
363. res for the wiper blades and arms and will not operate under the following conditions e Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is first turned ON the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tem perature is greater than 32 F 0 C e Transmission in NEUTRAL Position When the ignition is ON and the transmission is in the NEU TRAL position the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position NOTE Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Steering Lever N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 To unlock the steering column pull the lever downward POWER TILVTELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel IF EGUIPPED upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten This feature allows you to tilt the steering column the steering column pull t
364. ressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 415 CAUTION NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and or condition warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPM sensor The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for prope
365. rized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or gualified repair center Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed engine transmission power steering or air condi maintenance schedule there are other components which tioning Such damage is not covered by the New may reguire servicing or replacement in the future Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle 464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground w
366. rly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte t nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test
367. ront and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel NOTE The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The trunk lid can be released from Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know outside the vehicle by pressing the Before Starting Your Vehicle for more information on TRUNK button on the Remote trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature Keyless Entry RKE transmitter twice within five seconds TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the Blacafd7 Trunk Release Button With the ignition in the ON RUN position the Trunk trunk lid when ens vehicle is unattended Once in Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster the trunk young children may not be able to escape indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped heat stroke With the ignition in the OFF position or the key removed from the ignition switch the Trunk Open sym
368. rontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags SABIC air bags SAB Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Seat belts are ne
369. rovides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle The distance the driver s seat moves depends on where you have the driver s seat positioned when you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go e When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver s seat will move about 2 4 in 60 mm rearward if the driver s seat position is greater than or equal to 2 7 in 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN position When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver s seat will move to a position 0 3 in 7 7 mm forward of the rear stop if the driver s seat position is between 0 9 in and 2 7 in 22 7 mm and 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition in the ACC or RUN position e The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver s seat position is less than 0 9 in 22 7 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memor
370. rrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the light 030434976 Illuminated Vanity Mirror Slide On Rod And Extender Features Of Sun Visor To use the Slide On Rod feature of the sun visor rotate the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is parallel to the side window grabbing the sun visor with your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 desired position To use the extender feature of the sun visor grab the extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull rearward 030440176 Slide On Rod Feature BLIND SPOT MONITORING IF EQUIPPED The Blind S
371. ruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or WARNING move the vehicle e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key Automatic Transmission fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children before shifting into any driving gear CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Continued Continued 358 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION Continued e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as th
372. ry where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can utilize the touch screen or press the vR button and say the word Send then the sequence you wish to enter For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the EvR button and say Send 3 7 4 6 Saying Send followed by a number or sequence of numbers is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu stru
373. s On With Wipers Available With E To Accelerate Por Passing vuosctessveeks 216 Automatic Headlights Only 207 ll Adaptive Cruise Control O Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 207 ACC If Equipped 217 N Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 208 H Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation 220 WE Power Tilt Telescoping Steering Column If O Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC 220 E di EL TO ed ARE ao dedo Pd dO e Hber iss 22 ll Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped 210 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 222 W Parksense Rear Park Assist If Equipped 241 o To Set A Desired ACC Speed To agcel sa oa oe ee ee ee OE RE ee ee P O To Turn Off O To Resume Speed 294 uox 2 ER EES S o To Vary The Speed Setting O Setting The Following Distance In ACC D Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu o Display Warnings And Maintenance O Precautions While Driving With ACC O General Information D Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode s xa REOR x3 ERR o Forward Collision Warning If Equipped 236 238 O Parksense Sensors lees 242 O Parksense Warning Display O Parksense Display sive ess RE ET ES O Enabling And Disabling Parksense O Service The Parksense Rear Park Assist SIEL LS eke eee hha ae oe esse aos RSS 246 O Cleaning The Parksense System 246 O Parksense System Usage Precautions
374. s and release the OFF Near or Far button Then touch the arrow back soft key For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Park Assist Touch the Park Assist soft key to change this display The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF To change the Park Assist status press and release the OFF Sound Only or Sounds and Display soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to ParkSense Rear Park Assist in Understand ing The Features Of Your Vehicle for system function and operating information e Tilt Mirrors In Reverse Touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the outside rear view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the REVERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Blind Spot Alert Touch the Blind Spot Alert soft key to change this dis play When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert feature can be s
375. s and hold the SELECT button for two seconds The current display will reset along with other functions Units Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Units displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 button The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Info displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the available information displays then press SELECT to display any one of the following choices e Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature e Oil Temperature Displays the actual oil temperature e Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure e Trans Temperature Displays the actual transmission temperature e Engine Hours Displays the number of hours of engine operation e Tire Pressure Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire EXCLUDING THE SPARE TIRE Messages Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons This feature shows the number of stored warning mes sages in the place holder
376. s calibrated You may also NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Audio After pressing the Audio soft key the following settings will be available e BalancelFade When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings e Equalizer When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch directly on the desired setting e Speed Adjusted Volume This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume touch the Off 1 2 or 3 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Music Info Cleanup This feature helps organize music files for optimized music navigation To make your selection touch the Music Info Cleanup soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Surround Sound This feature provides simulated surround sound mode To make your selection touch the Surround Sound soft key select On or Off followed b
377. s low engine oil pressure If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood e Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition is first cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key whe
378. s oe x 09 Hd takes 340 visor D 2 2 Cold Weather Operation 4s v sass oes ed PARS 360 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 339 Compaci Spare Vie ss RAAS tiaki 405 Computer His Travel ao RE REY RD saori 302 Connector LET gs eee ee Paes N ee seh eee 335 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 335 Conserving Fuel mass se EER POOR KERE es 4 300 N INDEX 541 Console Floor ese ES BEG 272 Console Overhead 21242 2o eR oo EE RED S 251 Contract Service uu oe Gas s eos AS EE EE A ELS 531 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 479 Coole SVS ob asd 5 dye a bb dae eh qe gira 476 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 478 Coolant Capacity n si foc aha RARR AS ROES 505 Coolant Level cess 477 480 Disposal of Used Coolant osse ERROR Vel 480 Drain Flush and Refill 477 lige uno ea ai RR ED RT ie Chee GRAAG DE 480 Points to Remember i s ARE ER SEKER 4 481 Dies ie Cap uos a as ee ees Ret eee RR 479 Radiator ED iss ane tay VERE OR EX 479 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 477 505 506 Corrosion Protection asus xu 4446 4 ose 486 Cruise Control Speed Control 217 COPRONO err 268 491 Customer Assistance sn 529 Data Recorder Event 2 2 xzu ku RR EES 8 69 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 204 Daytime Running Lights s 3 eme days ees 198 Dealer SCV esses OER eaten poe Rr 462 Deck Lid Emergency Release s 2d se N bes s 41 Deck Lid Power Release
379. s that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact The SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats 2 NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Air Bag Warning Light e Steering Wheel and Column e Instrument Panel 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Knee Impact Bolster Driver Advanced Front Air Bag Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SA
380. s the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet park Ing 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020241333 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up Ignition Or Accessory On Message Opening the driver s door when the ignition is in ACC or ON engine not running a chime will sound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF In addition to the chime the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster NOTE With the Uconnect Touch system the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 WARNING CAUTION e When leav
381. se the park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after three minutes turn all of the visual signals off after 15 additional minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition system refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF e For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition 2 Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle e l ress LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and or passenger door open e Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion e Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 3 If any doors are open close them e For vehicles not equipped with Keyless
382. se grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 536 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 538 INDEX NEE id AbDout Your Dr
383. selection touch the Passive Entry soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle e Personal Settings Linked To FOB If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Memory Linked To FOB soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start After pressing the Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start soft key the following settings will be available e Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto On Driver Heated
384. seness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Key Fob with Remote x2 Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start e Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob P may reduce this range How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK e Doors closed e Hood closed e Trunk closed e HAZARD switch off e BRAKE switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Battery at an acceptable charge level 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e RKE PANIC button not pressed e System not disabled from previous remote start event Vehicle theft alarm not active Ignition in OFF position WARNING e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious inj
385. sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg 400 STARTING AND OPERATING M TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 EXAMPLE 3 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs MINUS Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs
386. servoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Rear Axle MOPAR Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent with MOPAR Friction Modifier Hypoid Gear Additive MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Bl Maintenance Schedule 510 O Required Maintenance Intervals 512 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 510 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES See MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oi
387. set distance until e The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed e The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor e The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph 24 km h and the system automatically disengages itself N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 e The distance setting is changed e The system disengages Refer to the information on ACC Activation The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited how ever the driver can always apply the brakes manually if necessary NOTE The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance If this occurs a visual alert BRAKE will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity When this occurs you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead 83 F NE BRAKE 032433102 Brake Alert Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings The EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer The information it displays depends on ACC system status 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ACC ACC SET
388. sibility for the driver To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Push Button NOTE The outboard head restraints are not adjustable Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for tether routing 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Folding Rear Seat After releasing the seatback it can be folded forward The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area To fold the rear seatback pull on the loops located on the upper seatback NOTE These loops can be tucked away when not in use Folded Rear Seatback When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap 030936862 Rear Seatback Loop N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injuty The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could
389. side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 403 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tir
390. sitive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting 450 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE NOTE Turn off the Electronic Stability Program ESP If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it if equipped or Traction Control System TCS if can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduc
391. sly downloaded phonebook is avail able for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Emergency And Towing Assistance The 911 Help numbers can only be altered These can not be deleted or the names can not be changed To change the 911 Help number follow these steps e Touch the phonebook soft key from the Phone main screen e Touch the 911 Help soft key Touch the appropriate listing to alter Emergency for example e Once Emergency is touched the Edit soft key appears Touch the Edit soft key and you will be given the choice to Edit Number or Reset to Default e Follow the on screen prompts to complete the task Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have Ways To Initiate A Phone Call Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect Phone e Redial e Dial by touching
392. soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Compass Settings After pressing the Compass Settings soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 040506040 Compass Variance Map e Perform Compass Calibration Touch the Calibration soft key to change this setting This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass i
393. solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console NOTE The cupholder cannot be removed 492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FUSES CAUTION Integrated Power Module The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment This module contains fuses and relays e When installing the integrated power module cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the integrated power module and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected ul 072710829 y Integrated Power Module MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493 Cavity Car Mini Description Car tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Spae Red 5 40 Amp Anti Lock Brakes 25 Amp Anti Lock Brakes Green Natural Fuse Spae 25 Amp 7 Fuse Spae
394. ssible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passenger ALR ALR ALR e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide
395. steep hills This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Using ACC On Hills Lane Changing When driving on hills ACC may not detect a vehicle in ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the your lane Depending on the speed vehicle load traffic lane in which you are traveling In the illustration shown conditions and the steepness of the hills ACC perfor ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and mance may be limited it may not detect the vehicle until it s too late for the ACC system to take action ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane There will not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle Always be atten tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane There will not be suffi cient distance to the vehicle ahead 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Stationary Objects And Vehicles ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles For example ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary
396. stem is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage ee STARTING AND OPERATING 379 NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully rele
397. stem is turned on and in the READY state the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC dis plays Adaptive Cruise Ready When the system is OFF the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Control Off NOTE You cannot enable ACC under the following conditions e When you apply the brakes e When the parking brake is set NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 e When the automatic transmission is in PARK RE VERSE or NEUTRAL e When pushing the RES button without a previously set speed in memory Adaptive To Activate Cruise Control 3 Push and release the ON OFF button The ACC menu in Ready the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Ready 56789 mi Adaptive Cruise Control Ready To turn the system OFF push and release the ON OFF button again At this time the system will turn off and the EVIC will display Adaptive Cruise Control Off 032433097 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system on when not in use is dangerous You could acciden EE LL UR EE 55 oe tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have a collision Always leave the system off when you are not using it ie c6 56789 mi To Set A Desired ACC Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the A SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed ACC Set Remove your foot from the acceler
398. store interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch ay 4 L Te i E ese 033333449 Ambient Light UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 Dimmer Controls With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the left The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of located on the left side of the instrument panel the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders if equipped Dimmer Controls Instrument Panel Dimmer 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rotating the right dimmer control upward will increase Dome Light Position the brightness of the door handle lights and map pockets Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior Light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the G Odometer EVIC if equipped and radio when the park Door Handle Map Pocket Dimmer ing lights or headlights are on N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 WINDSHIELD W
399. sult in damage or removal of e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu paint and decals lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove Special Care e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once and to protect your paint finish Take care never to a month scratch the paint 488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ee It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel
400. switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 18 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN e Each time the ignition
401. sword if Voicemail pass word is stored in your mobile phonebook Recent Calls You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the following call types e Incoming Calls e Outgoing Calls Missed Calls All Calls These can be accessed by touching the recent calls soft key on the Phone main screen You can also press the button and say Show my incoming calls from any screen and the Incoming calls will be displayed NOTE Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing Recent or Missed Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will display a pop up showing Answer or Ignore Press the Answer soft key or the amp button on the steering wheel to accept the call N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Uconnect Phone will then interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will display a pop up showing Answer Ignore or Transfer Press the amp button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejec
402. system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot 436 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES TIREFIT Storage TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk Q 9 pA o 060410595 1 Sealant Bottle TIREFIT Location 2 Deflation Button 3 Pressure Gauge 4 Power Button WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 437 5 Mode Select Knob Selecting Sealant Mode Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to this Pe Ene aaa position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant 7 Air Pump Hose Black why and to inflate the tire Use the Sealant 8 Power Plug AA Hose clear hose 6 when selecting this mode Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode Using The Power Button Push and release the Power Button 4 once to turn On the TIREFIT kit Push and release the Power Button 4 again to turn Off the TIREFIT kit Using The Deflation Button y Press the Deflation Button 2 to reduce the air Selecting Air Mode Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to this position y for air pump operation only Use the Black Air J Pump Hose 7 when selecting this mode pressure in the tire if it becomes over inflated 438 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M TIREFIT Usage Precautions Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 prior to the expiration date printed on the bottle label to assure optimum operation of the sys tem
403. t to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release Access Cover If you are unable to open the fuel filler door use the fuel 3 Pull the release cable filler door emergency release 1 Open the trunk ee STARTING AND OPERATING 429 Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer Month and year of manufacture ra e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front Release Cable VEHICLE LOADING e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on e Vehicle Identification Number VIN the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH e Type of Vehicle The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN 430 STARTING AND OPERATING ie Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVW
404. t key to return to the previous menu Doors amp Locks After pressing the Doors amp Locks soft key the following settings will be available e Auto Unlock On Exit When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Flash Headlight With Lock When this feature is selected the headlights will flash whe n the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To make your selection touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 e Sound Horn With Lock When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the
405. t of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M windows down or the sunroof if equipped is
406. t on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident vehicle in an accident increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during an accident You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 WARNING 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to internal injury in an accident The belt forces allow the belt to retract fully won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but WARNING across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt will not protect you properly In a
407. t temperature con trol Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automati cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 11 Driver Temperature Control Up Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for warmer temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automati cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 12 Modes The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets demist outlets and defrost outlets The Mode settings are as follows e Panel Mode gt gt Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets e Bi Level Mode gt Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets u 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE BI LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets e Floor Mode N Air comes from t
408. tch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear EQUIPPED camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear appears again Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate istance to the rear of the vehicle Red 1 ft 30cm When displayed static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle while a dashed center line will indicate the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to 3 a hitch receiver The static grid lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone Yellow 0 ft 3 ft BO cm 1m 3 ft or greater 1 m or greater 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION Drivers must be careful when backing up even when e To avoid v
409. tection Door Lock Location 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock knob up unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle KEYLESS ENTER N GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons 021835322 NOTE e Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your WARNING Instrument Panel for further information e If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time Child Protection Door Lock Function Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 e If the vehicle is unlocked by the RKE transmitter or Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds the vehicle will re lock and if equipped will arm the theft alarm To Unlock Fro
410. teering Column 10 Amp Park Assist Blind Spot Red Module Clock Red Camera 10 Amp Battery Sensor 15 Amp Cluster Rearview Red Blue Mirror Compass 10 Amp Adaptive Cruise Control Red BE EE ETE AM SJ 0 Fl 36 Fuse Spare ii 10 Amp Adaptive Front Lighting Red xe 40 a WENN 33 34 35 37 15 Amp Radio Blue 38 20 Amp Active Suspension 40 Yellow 41 2 20 Amp Power Outlet Inside Yellow Arm Rest Fuse Spare Fuse Spare 3 i 5 6 7 8 9 50 4 30 Amp Pink MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 51 20 Amp Front Heated Seats Yellow Fuse Spare 52 10 Amp Heated Cupholders Fuse Spare Red Rear Heated Seat 25 Amp Rear Windows 10 Amp Airbag Module Red Es Es Ma Ma 54 Fuse Spare _ eee ME al ME 55 Fuse Spare sys 58 10 Amp Airbag Module Red e se Spare Ee Fase Spare 15 Amp Run Sense Blue 15 Amp Illumination Rear Sun Blue shade Fuse Spare Fuse Spare 5 10 Amp HVAC Module In Car Red Temperature Sensor Ega 6l 62 63 64 65 67 70 500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sie VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may
411. ter shudder Using a transmission fluid Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper other than that recommended by the manufacturer maintenance intervals will require more frequent fluid and filter If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu fluid and filter should be changed ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur ther information Rear Axle l For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not Continued required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be 486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Change Axle Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals t
412. than 10 mph 16 km h and the vehicle remains in speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h the blind spot for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning light will be illuminated If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph 16 km h the warning light will not illuminate Rear Monitoring 030405537 Overtaking A pproaching UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Overtaking Passing Stationary Objects The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage berms etc However occasionally the system may alert on such objects This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicy clists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system always check your vehicle s mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your turn signal before changing lanes Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Rear Cross Path The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended to aid the drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be bloc
413. the following conditions e You can replace Incoming Calls with Outgoing Calls or Missed Calls e Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect system is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone supports messaging over Bluetooth e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation e You can replace 4 with any message number shown on the screen 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M VOICE COMMAND Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 Nav The Uconnect Voice Command system al ti VR lows you to control your AM FM radio satel lite radio disc player SD Card USB iPod and Sirius Travel Link NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Command system as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Command system to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death W
414. the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using FM 81 7 we the Uconnect Touch System EE S Touch the Controls soft key then touch the Heated amd SENSE Steering Wheel soft key to turn on the heated steering Seat Sew MU wheel Press the Heated Steering Wheel soft key a se f vere second time to turn the heated steering wheel off En ap 8874 10 10 NW 54 ou ay asked Mm 1 6 1130 1310 Heated Steering Wheel Soft Key NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate Vehicles Eguipped With Remote Start On models that are eguipped with remote start the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on 030939992 Controls Soft Key 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped
415. the emergency key or a 2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 021337430 3 Remove the battery by turning the back cover over battery facing downward and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar then replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Clo
416. the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition
417. the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit ter buttons for all RKE transmitters 021341332 Key Fob With RKE Transmitter To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 within five seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Flash Lights With Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Turn He
418. ting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the Sve button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress Or you can place a call on hold by touching the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen then dial a number from the dialpad recent calls or from the phonebooks To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Join Calls in this section Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Also you can press the Swap soft key on the Phone main screen 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Join Calls When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Join Calls soft key on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the End soft key or the amp button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a
419. tion and possible injury to the 2226109 child Use only the anchor positions directly behind Tether Strap Mounting the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether Cover A Tether Strap Hook strap 3 Attaching Strap B Tether Anchor NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the drivetrain engine transmission clutch and rear axle in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 500 miles 800 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in However wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil transmission fluid and axle lubricant installed at the factory is high quality and energy conserving Oil fluid and lubricant changes should be consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recom mended viscosity and quality grad
420. to this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body Sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC i 12D482 126 AB 2nd Edition Printed in U S A
421. try Exit Seat Available With Memory Seat Only 192 W To Open And Close The Hood 194 NE ce ee d een d FOR er ae 195 a Headin OWING 42 eee eee EErEE 195 E Automatic Headligiis ss 2o ctor reres 196 o Headlights On With Wipers 196 O0 Smartbeam If Equipped ss uc mmm 196 O Headlight hme Delay usse ER Res 197 O Daytime Running Lights DRL If eo ees pera bags ead EE EE EE ins E Lielis Oit Reminder 2c OES RARR ER oO Fog Lights If Equipped 198 D Multifunction Lever sisie da yere 199 TU INAS aos cee oa soon Ro ota eo eta Hs 199 O Lane Change Assist 000 200 o High Low Beam Switch 2 2 uen 200 o Flash lo Pass SS SS SS SS eves 200 B Front Map Reading Lights 201 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ELOTBBISRE LICK Sox eau hehe EER ER ts 202 W Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 212 AIO OTE TIUS sr 909 hy na Si RED RES EE 202 W Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 214 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 205 Bes di os acce x eed EE OE TER 215 H Intermittent Wiper System 205 o To Set A Desired Speed uua e peda Xs 215 O Wiper Opera sassi eo ac ES 3 9 kini 205 eyte ei vissie pa LE PRE DE 215 o Windshield Washers 222422444443 29 5 206 E To Resume Speed sssr eu soe oe eee 4 216 CNSC DURS a oo gute ae quen dor o ee hk Se 206 o To Vary The Speed Setting 216 3 Headlight
422. tside Door Handle Lock Button deck lid 021836568 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE e After pressing the door handle LOCK button you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either Passive Entry door handle This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking e The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel Power Window Switches There are single window controls on each passenger door WINDOWS trim panel which operate the passenger door windows Power Windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition The window controls on the driver s door control all the 1 in the ACC or ON RUN position door windows NOTE For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect Touch the power window switches will remain active NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the Key Fob Occupants particularly unattend
423. tween the Compass and Outside Temperature info at the top of the EVIC display This icon will appear whenever the Multi Displacement System MDS if equipped allows the engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL message and a new DTE value will display Miles Per Gallon MPG The Miles Per Gallon MPG feature displays instanta neous fuel economy in a bar graph below the DTE this function cannot be reset Press the BACK button to return to the
424. ty belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat Both types of child restraints are 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchor system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH WARNING Rearward facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehi
425. type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safe
426. u start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator Unit The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering column When the ORC detects a collision requiring the air bag it signals the inflator
427. uch as audio clarity echo and loudness NOTE Uconnect Phone SMS is only available when to a large degree rely on the phone and network and the vehicle is not in moving TM not the Uconnect Phone GEB M FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 o e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by Messaging gt Inbo lowering the in vehicle audio volume WEM UU Listen e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be MEEN Ai Sra compromised with the convertible top down E3 12 Beatrice Adams Listen m 11 Sanjiv Prabaker Listen SMS fej 10 Lin Ford Listen Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone EE 9 Jay Kay Listen Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth in order to use this feature If the Uconnect Phone determines your phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over Bluetooth the Messaging button will be greyed out and the feature will not be available for use 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message 10 10 NW 54 oul 68 a FM 91 7 Ye 72 F xl Ted Me SEEGE James Butler 9 39 am 12 08 08 Hey Bill am on my way to work Let me know if you have YYY Once a message is received and viewed or listened to you will have the following options e Send a Reply e Forward e Call Se
428. uetooth e Touch the Bluetooth soft key e Touch the Add Device soft key NOTE If there is no device currently connected with the system a pop up will appear e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled audio device When prompted on the device enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen e Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting e When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device Selecting Yes will make this device the highest priority This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range NOTE For devices which are not made a favorite the device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest device paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR command to bring up a list of paired audio devices e Show Paired Audio Devices N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or e Touch the soft key located to the right of the device Audio Device name Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority paired phone and or Audio Device within range If you would need to choose a particular e Touch the Disconnect Device soft key phone or Audio Device follow these steps e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings s
429. units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag The trim cover separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the full size The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in the side of the air bag NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air ba
430. ur radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather This system can be operated through either the Automatic Climate Controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect Touch system display When the Uconnect Touch system is in different modes Radio Player Settings More etc the driver and pas senger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the display General Overview Hard Keys Hard keys are located on the left and right side of the Uconnect Touch 4 3 screen in the center of the instru ment panel There are also hard keys located below the Uconnect Touch screen 044336084 Uconnect Touch System 4 3 Hard key UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341 Soft Keys Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch system screen F 045635318 Automatic Climate Controls Hard keys ATC System Shown 045641067 Uconnect Touch System 4 3 Manual Temperature Controls
431. ury or death Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely e Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Trunk Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low e Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle To Reset The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The vehicle doors will lock the parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle 2 To E
432. ussa EE oe HE RE 304 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEEN ll Uconnect Touch Settings Had kes PTT Fi Gl KEES Tr D Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Touch 4 3 Settings D Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Settings OSRT Performance Features ll iPod USB MP3 Control If Equipped lll Harman Kardon Logic7 High Performance Multichannel Surround Sound System With Driver Selectable Surround DSS If EUDE oa 9 x 33 e eR dna ENS Ed aoe ae N Steering Wheel Audio Controls 337 Ed Ope HO ss web nome ea AS HOED RE DS 338 HE D Plet TEE 338 B CD DVD Disc Maintenance 339 ll Radio Operation And Mobile Phones 339 B Climate Controls 00005 340 O General Overview esee 340 O Climate Control Functions 347 o Automatic Temperature Control ATC 348 E Operam Tips cu e euren rar ape prend 349 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES DAG ide 1 Air Outlet 7 ESC Off Switch 13 Engine Start Stop Button 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Uconnect Touch System Hard Controls 14 Trunk Release Button 3 Hazard Switch 9 SD Memory Card Slot 15 Dimmer Controls 4 Uconnect Touch System 10 Power Outlet 16 Hood Release 5 Climate Control Hard Controls 11 CD DVD Slot 17 Headlight Switch 6 Glove
433. ve Cruise Control Cancelled To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if e You push and release the ON OFF button 96789 mi road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 To Vary The Speed Setting While ACC is set you can increase the set speed by pressing and holding the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to in crease in 5 mph 8 km h increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h While ACC is set the set speed can be decreased by pressing and holding the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to de crease in 5 mph 8 km h increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h NOTE e When you use the SET button to decelerate if the engine s braking power does not slow th
434. vernment should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes 534 e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Se Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have bee
435. verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some thing Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing on the brake pedal Continued 366 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and turn the engine off When the ignition is in the OFF position the shift lever is locked in the PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Continued access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle NS 1AH TING AND OPERATING 367 CAUTION e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to
436. vide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense e Objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Drivers must be careful when backing up even WARNING Continued e Before using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist sys tem Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedes trians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued system it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hi
437. visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Uconnect Phone Button i The Uconnect Phone amp Button is used to get int
438. w Recent Calls 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Searching Contacts phone number Search for John Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone Smith Mobile Screen Activated Features Dialing via Keypad using touch screen Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis played on the touch screen Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the touch screen Pairing up to 10 phones audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites www chrysler com uconnect www dodge com uconnect www jeep com uconnect or call 1 877 855 8400 If your mobile phone only supports the Headset Profile you may not be able to use any Uconnect Phone features Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions followi
439. w defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS B Instrument Panel Features 279 Mi Instrument Cluster 280 W Instrument Cluster Descriptions 281 N Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 291 O Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Di PIE pacar sage een Suk RARE ae eae es 293 HEVIC White Telltale Lights esu 294 O EVIC Amber Telltale Lights 295 FLEVIC Red Telltale Lights 429a HER vor 296 o Oil Change Due O Fuel Economy A yenice Speed seasgar da EET en eee es 301 El lip TUG so aa De PERD EE iehor rhei 302 ELS eon ra skink RARR OR EDE HARE 302 D Vehicle Info Customer Information Features 303 FM Sies PC C ats ES ERAS KAS KERS 303 El Tura Went OU us r
440. wait for the beep which follows the Listen prompt or an other prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Call and then John Smith and then mobile the following com pound command can be said Call John Smith mo bile e For each feature explanation in this section only the compound command form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound com mand form voice command Search for John Smith or you can break the compound command form into two voice commands Search Contact and when asked John Smith Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conver sational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Natural Speech Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition VR engine 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly omith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen t
441. want to take these steps to protect your battery e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Rear Courtesy Reading Lamps W5W Rear Compartment Trunk Lamp 562 Overhead Console Reading Lamp 578 Vibor Vanity DOIS s ce disce e OTR Ge oh ed ns A6220 Glove Box Lamp If Equipped 194 Door COMICS x93 eee aoa 6e HR bnew AE 562 Shift Indicator Lamp 2442223 6s REED gt oi JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket Cupholder LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501 Exterior Bulb Number Low Beam Headlamp Standard Halogen H11 Low Beam Headlamp High Intensity Discharge ID i edema des ug E pad aded s D3S Serviced at Authorized Dealer High Beam Headlamp gt sis ne DIS ae EE arn iode 9005 Front Park Turn Camp sr ooo ad Gow eons oe 3157
442. whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate To make your selection touch the ParkView Backup Camera soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Rain Sensing Auto Wipers When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection touch the Rain Sensing soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Hill Start Assist If Equipped When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection touch the Hill Start Assist soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Lights After pressing the Lights soft key the follo
443. wing settings will be available e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlight Illumination On Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Headlights With Wipers If Equipped When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection touch the Headlights With Wipers soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto Dim High Beams If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection touch the Auto
444. wn Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Set Time Minutes When in this display you may adjust the minutes The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the minutes up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Time Format When in this display you may select the time format display setting Touch the Time Format soft key until a check mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Show Time In Status Bar When in this display you may turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar To change the Show Time Status setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft key 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Safety Assistance After pressing the Safety Assistance soft key the fol lowing settings will be available e Front Collision Sensitivity If Equipped The Front Collision Warning FCW feature can be can be set to Far set to Near or turned Off The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn y
445. xit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shutdowns the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button NOTE The message Push Start Button will display in the EVIC until you push the START button DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward To unlock the front doors pull the inside door handle to the first detent To unlock the rear doors pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward 045635319 Door Lock Knob If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door the door will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 WARNING For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicl
446. y Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463 WARNING CAUTION You can be badly injured working on or around a e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per motor vehicle Only do service work for which you formi pan ane Renae En necessary Goud result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an autho
447. y be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection touch the Flash Headlights With Lock soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Doors amp Locks e Auto Unlock On Exit Touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key to change this display When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Flash Lights With Lock Touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter To make your selection touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Sound Horn With Remote Start Touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Sound Horn With Lock Touch the Sounds Horn With Lock soft key to change this display When this feature is sele
448. y is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the engine compartment for jump starting NOTE The remote battery posts are viewed by standing on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 447 WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery a Remote Battery Posts 1 Remote Positive Post 2 Remote Negative Post 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 448 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park CAUTION the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Failure to follow these procedures could result in WARNINCG damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle Do not allow vehicles to touch each ot
449. y point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Set Language When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Touch the Set Language soft key and then touch the desired language soft key until a check mark appears next to the language showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Units When in this display you may select to have the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped changed between US and Metric units of measure Touch US or Metric until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Voice Response Length When in this display you may change the Voice Re sponse Length settings To change the Voice Response Length touch the Brief or Detailed soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Touchscreen Beep When in this display you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touch screen button soft key is pressed Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the bac
450. y pressing the arrow back soft key 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Phone Bluetooth After pressing the Phone Bluetooth soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Touch Supplement SIRIUS Setup After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft key the following settings will be available e Channel Skip SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection touch the Channel Skip soft key select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Subscription Information New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re subscribe Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription SRT Performance Features To access the SRT Performance Features touch the More soft key t
451. y setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety Two latches must be released to open the hood catch to the left The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel f 031305159 Hood Safety Catch Hood Release Lever N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 CAUTION LIGHTS Headlight Switch To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to TY The headlight switch is located on the left side of close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi i amp the instrument panel This switch controls the mately 6 in 15 cm and then drop it This should operation of the headlights parking lights instru secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless ment panel lights instrument panel light dimming inte the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged rior lights and fog lights WARNINCG Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is
452. you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing NOTE e You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to complete this procedure e The vehicle must be in PARK 1 Press the Phone soft key on the screen to begin 2 If there is no phone currently connected with the system a pop up will appear 10 10 NW 54 out 68 AR FM 91 7 Wo 72 Would you like to pair a phone No phone connected 030536843 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Select Yes to begin the pairing process Then search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen e If No is selected touch the Settings soft key from the Uconnect Phone main screen e Touch the Add Device soft key e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen e See Step 4 to complete the process 4 Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting 68 t FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Ww 72 Bluetooth pairing in progress Please wait 5 When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone S
453. ystem to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belts The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR to secure a Child Restraint System CRS These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode The chart below defines the seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate Driver Center Passenger CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock ALR ALR ALR ALR e N A

2012 Dodge Charger SRT8 Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents